JP6664792B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention provides a symbol display unit having a plurality of variable display columns for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, a start switch for starting the variable display of the symbol display unit, and a corresponding one of the plurality of variable display columns. And a stop switch for stopping the variable display.

  Conventionally, as a slot machine that is a spinning-type gaming machine, it is possible to specify an advantageous operation mode of a left / middle / right stop switch for performing an operation for stopping a rotation of a left / middle / right reel. A notification lamp (advantage section lamp) for notifying that the game is in a special game permissible state (advantage section) that allows a special game to be performed, the total number of games, the number of games in the advantage section (the number of advantageous section games), and games The total number of medals to be used as value, the number of bonuses to be paid, and the like are totaled, and the advantageous section ratio (the ratio of the number of advantageous sections to the total number of games), the bonus ratio (the ratio of the number of paid bonuses to the number of paid out), etc. Is calculated, and the calculated ratio is displayed on a ratio display device so that it is possible to discover at an early stage whether fraud or the like has been performed or not (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Patent No. 6151414 (for example, paragraphs 0237 to 0285, 0354 to 0457, 0465 to 0489, etc.)

  The gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1 is configured to constantly display the calculated advantageous section ratio, the accessory ratio, and the like so that fraud and failure can be found at an early stage. The total number of payouts, the number of payables, the number of games, the number of games in an advantageous section, etc.) are cumulatively counted for every 400 games, and each ratio is calculated. As each ratio is calculated, it is updated to a new ratio on the ratio display. Here, the data used for the ratio calculation is stored in a storage area (one of 2, 3, or 4 bytes according to the type of data) set at a predetermined address of the RAM. Although the storage capacity of these data increases as the number of games increases, the storage capacity of each data is limited, and thus may exceed the upper limit of the storage capacity. Therefore, the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1 is configured such that when the data amount exceeds the upper limit, the excess amount is discarded and the subsequent data is not counted.

  According to this configuration, when the data amount exceeds the upper limit, a difference may occur between the actual ratio and the ratio displayed on the ratio display, and it is not possible to judge fraud or the like based on the accurate ratio display. There is a risk.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and has been achieved in a gaming machine having an indicator for displaying game information such as an advantageous section ratio (a ratio of the number of advantageous section games to the total number of games) and an accessory ratio. It is an object of the present invention to enable early detection of fraud or failure based on a simple display.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention has a symbol display means having a plurality of variable display columns for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, a start switch for starting variable display of the symbol display means, A gaming machine having a stop switch for stopping the variable display corresponding to each of the plurality of variable display columns, wherein a main control means for controlling the progress of the game is provided, and the main control unit accommodated in the board case is provided. A plate , wherein the main control means performs a role lottery means for determining whether or not a plurality of types of roles are won, and each of the plurality of variable display columns based on an operation on each of the stop switches. Stop control means for performing stop control for stopping display, and a symbol combination of the plurality of variable display rows stopped by the stop control by the stop control means. A prize determining means for determining whether or not a winning is achieved, a payout controlling means for performing a payout process for a game value based on a result of the determination by the prize determining means, the data relating to aggregates in the first counting period, the collecting unit to summarize each second counting period consisting of the first counting period in which aggregated is finished, the first counting period by the aggregator Counting result storage means configured to be able to store the first counting result in the second counting result and the second counting result in the second counting period, and a predetermined operation using the second counting result and an arithmetic means for performing, N in the first counting result is the counting result storage means (N is an integer of 1 or more) is adapted to be stored in the first storage area of bytes, the second The tally result is stored in the tally result storage means. N × 2) bytes are stored in a second storage area, and the tallying means is provided for each game in the first tallying period for each of the first tallying periods. By adding the value of the data based on the result of the determination to the storage value of the first storage area and updating the value, the first aggregation result in the first aggregation period is stored in the first storage area. And storing the first totaling result in the first totaling period in each of the first totaling periods at a prescribed totaling timing after storing the first totaling result in the first storage area. The first storage result in the first storage period stored in the first storage area is added to the storage value of the second storage area before being updated at the collection timing and updated. By doing so, the second second aggregation period The totaling result can be stored in the second storage area, and the totaling unit stores the first totaling result in the first totalizing period in the first totalizing period in the first totaling period. At a certain aggregation timing after storing in the storage area, the first aggregation result in the certain first aggregation period stored in the first storage area and the first aggregation result before being updated at the certain aggregation timing. A determination process is performed to determine whether or not the total value of the storage values of the second storage area exceeds the maximum value that can be stored in the second storage area. and updates the stored value of the second storage area at the time, more than a case where the determination, the line to update the stored value of the second storage area in each aggregate timing of the certain aggregated timing or later Ukoto no, in the determination process, the first The first counting result of N bytes in the certain first counting period stored in the storage area, and (N × 2) bytes of the second storage area before being updated at the certain counting timing Is lower than the maximum value that can be stored in the lower N bytes, and the lower storage value of the second storage area before being updated at the certain aggregation timing is calculated. When the value of the upper N bytes of the storage value of (N × 2) bytes satisfies both of the maximum value that can be stored in the upper N bytes, the total value can be stored in the second storage area. It is characterized in that it is determined that the maximum value is exceeded .

According to this configuration, aggregation means, when the second summing results new is determined to exceed the maximum value that can be stored in the second storage area of the counting result storage means, the new second aggregation result without updating the stored contents of the second storage area of the counting result storage means based on, for thereafter maintains the second counting result of the previous, it can be stored in the second storage area of the counting result storage means The game history information is not calculated in a state where the amount exceeding the maximum value is truncated. Therefore, even if the second summing results becomes the second state exceeds the maximum value that can be stored in the storage area of the counting result storage means, early discovery of fraud or failure based on the exact game history information can do.

In order to achieve the above object, another gaming machine according to the present invention has a symbol display means having a plurality of variable display columns for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and a start switch for starting variable display of the symbol display means. And a stop switch for stopping the variable display corresponding to each of the plurality of variable display columns, wherein a main control means for controlling the progress of the game is provided, and the main control unit accommodated in the board case is provided. a control board, the main control unit includes a winning combination lottery unit which performs the role lottery to determine whether winning the prize of a plurality of types, the plurality of variable display columns based on the operation for each of the stop switch respectively Stop control means for performing stop control for stopping variable display of the symbols, and a symbol combination of the plurality of variable display columns stopped by the stop control by the stop control means. A prize determining means for determining whether or not a prize has been won, a payout control means for performing a payout process for a game value based on a determination result by the prize determining means, A totaling means for totalizing data pertaining to information at predetermined counting timings based on a result of the determination by the winning determination means; a totaling result storing means for storing a totaling result by the totaling means; and an arithmetic means for performing arithmetic, the aggregation unit, in the first aggregate timing, together and stores the counting result in the counting result storage means, in the second and subsequent aggregation timing, from the previous aggregate timing The total up to the totaling timing is totaled, and the sum of this total and the previous totaling result stored in the totaling result storage means is added to the new totaling. As a result, the storage contents of the aggregation result storage means can be updated, and the data amount of a new aggregation result obtained by summing the aggregation amount at a certain aggregation timing and the previous aggregation result, from the certain aggregation timing to the next aggregation timing If it is determined that the data amount obtained by adding the maximum value of the data amount for the aggregation that is assumed when the minutes are aggregated exceeds the storage capacity of the aggregation result storage unit, the data amount is calculated based on the new aggregation result. After updating the tallying result storage means, by not updating the storage contents of the tallying result storage means for the subsequent tallying amount including the tallying amount at the next tallying timing, It is characterized in that the new tally result stored in the tally result storage means is maintained.

According to this configuration, the tallying unit calculates the data amount obtained by adding the maximum value of the data amount for the tallying assumed when the tallying is performed at the next tallying time. If it is determined that the total capacity exceeds the storage capacity of the tally result storage unit, then the storage contents of the tally result storage unit are maintained with the new tally result. In this case, the update of the tally result is not performed before the storage capacity of the tally result storage unit is exceeded, so that the game history information may be calculated in a state where the amount exceeding the storage capacity of the tally result storage unit is truncated. Absent. Therefore, even if the data amount of the aggregate result is a state that exceeds the capacity of the aggregation result storage means can be detected early fraud or failure based on the exact game history information.

In order to achieve the above object, still another gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a symbol display unit having a plurality of variable display columns for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and a start for starting the variable display of the symbol display unit. In a gaming machine having a switch and a stop switch for stopping the variable display corresponding to each of the plurality of variable display columns, main control means for controlling the progress of the game is provided, and the main control means is accommodated in a board case. A main control board, wherein the main control means performs a role lottery means for determining whether or not a plurality of types of roles are won, and each of the plurality of variable display rows based on an operation on each of the stop switches. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing stop control means for performing stop control for stopping variable display of the plurality of variable display columns stopped by stop control by the stop control means. Based on the combination, a prize determining means for determining whether or not a winning combination has been won, a payout control means for performing a payout process of a game value based on a determination result by the winning determination means, Totaling means for totalizing the first data relating to the first specific information and the second data relating to the second specific information; a first totaling result of the first data by the totalizing means; Aggregation result storage means configured to be able to store the second aggregation result of the data in the first storage area and the second storage area, and the first aggregation result and the second aggregation result Calculating means for performing a predetermined calculation using the first totaling result before the second totaling result exceeds the maximum value that can be stored in the capacity of the second storage area. Is stored in the capacity of the first storage area. The totaling means is configured to exceed a maximum possible value, and for each first totaling period, the first data based on the determination result by the winning determination unit in each game in the first totaling period. And the value of the second data based on the determination result by the winning determination means in each game in the first tally period, and the tally means collects the first data in each of the first tally periods. At the specified aggregation timing after the aggregation of the first data and the aggregation of the second data in the aggregation period are completed, and in the first aggregation period lastly aggregated before the aggregation timing. By adding the tally result of the first data to the storage value in the first storage area before being updated at the tally timing, the first data is updated in the first tally period in a new second tally period. Tally the result It is possible to store it in a storage area, and to collect the totaling result of the second data in the first totaling period, which is lastly totaled before the totaling timing, before updating at the totaling timing. By adding to and updating the storage value of the second storage area, the second aggregation result in a new second aggregation period can be stored in the second storage area. At the timing, the totaling result of the first data in the first totaling period, which is lastly totaled before the totaling timing, and the storage value of the first storage area before being updated at the totaling timing, When the total value of the first storage area exceeds the maximum value that can be stored in the first storage area, the first value indicating the maximum value or less is changed to the second value indicating that the maximum value is exceeded. Flag is provided, The measuring means determines whether the flag has reached the second value before the certain counting timing at a certain counting timing, and determines that the flag has reached the second value before the certain counting timing. If it is determined that the flag is not updated, the storage values of the first storage area and the second storage area are not updated, and the flag does not reach the second value before the certain aggregation timing. If it is determined, the totaling result of the first data in the first totaling period lastly totaled before the certain totaling timing and the first data before being updated at the certain totaling timing Determining whether the total value with the storage value of the storage area exceeds the maximum value that can be stored in the first storage area; if it is determined that the total value exceeds the maximum value, the flag is set to the first value From the said And not updating the storage value of the first storage area, and determining and updating the storage value of the first storage area when it is determined that the storage value is not exceeded. Performing a process to determine whether the flag after the determination / update process has reached the second value. If the flag has not reached the second value, the storage value of the second storage area is determined. It is characterized in that updating is performed, and when the value is the second value, the stored value of the second storage area is not updated .

According to this configuration, when the totaling unit determines that the new first totaling result exceeds the maximum value that can be stored in the first storage area of the totaling result storage unit, the totaling unit adds the new first totaling result to the new first totaling result. Since the storage content of the first storage area of the tally result storage unit is not updated based on the above, the previous first tally result is maintained thereafter, so that the first storage area of the tally result storage unit can store the first tally result. The game history information is not calculated in a state where the value exceeding the maximum value is truncated. Therefore, even when the first tally result exceeds the maximum value that can be stored in the first storage area of the tally result storage means, it is possible to early find out fraud or failure based on accurate game history information. Can be.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a spinning-type gaming machine (slot machine) according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a view showing a symbol arrangement of reels of the spinning-type gaming machine (slot machine) of FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the spinning-type gaming machine (slot machine) of FIG. 1. FIG. 4 is an external view illustrating an arrangement state of a main control board in FIG. 3. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a main control board of FIG. 4. FIG. 5 is a schematic perspective view of a part of the main control board of FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram illustrating functions of a main control board and a sub control board in FIG. 3. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a combination and a reel symbol, and the payout number of medals. It is a figure showing the relation between the role lottery result and the command. It is a figure showing a relation between a winning probability of each winning combination group and a set value. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining storage contents of a game information storage unit in FIG. 7. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining other storage contents of the game information storage means of FIG. 7. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a relationship between a 7-segment display and 1-byte (8-bit) display data. It is explanatory drawing of the display method of a ratio display. It is explanatory drawing of the display method of a ratio display. It is explanatory drawing of the display method of a ratio display, (a) is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display item according to a setting value, (b) is a figure which shows the example of a display of the setting value in a 7 segment display. It is explanatory drawing of the display method of a ratio display, (a) is a figure which shows the relationship between the lighting of the dot of the thousands place, the tens place, and the ones place of the ratio display and the abnormal normal state of game inspection information. Yes, (b) is a diagram showing a specific example of the display content of the ratio display according to the game situation. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a power-on process. 19 is a flowchart showing the RWM backup failure determination processing (step S3) of FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a power-on initialization process (step S4) of FIG. 18. 19 is a flowchart showing a setting change process (step S7) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the game information totalization processing 1 (step S212) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game information totalization processing 2 (step S213) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 400 update process (steps S231, S233, S236) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game number update process (step S238, S241) of FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the 6000 update process (steps S246, S247, S248) of FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the cumulative update process (steps S250, S252, S253) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. 30 is a flowchart showing a power interruption process (step S434) of FIG. 29. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an outside-of-use-area interrupt process (step S437) of FIG. 29. It is a flowchart which shows the ratio display related timer update process (step S534) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows each ratio calculation (step S535) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows each ratio display setting (step S536) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows each ratio display setting (step S536) of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows each ratio display setting (step S536) of FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing ratio display data acquisition 1 (step S704) of FIG. 34. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing ratio display data acquisition 2 (step S723) of FIG. 36. 39 is a flowchart showing a display data acquisition process (steps S809, S810, S826, S827) of FIGS. 37 and 38. It is a modification of a ratio indicator. 14 shows another modification of the ratio display. 14 shows another modification of the ratio display. 14 shows another modification of the ratio display. It is a flow chart which shows game information totalization processing 1 of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows game information totalization processing 2 of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the game number update process of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the total update process of 2nd Embodiment of this invention.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a spinning-type gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as a slot machine), which is a gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

(Constitution)
An outline of the configuration of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the front opening of the housing 3 is openably and closably closed by a front door 5, and an operation plate 7 is provided at a position substantially at the center of the front door 5. A front plate 9 is provided above the front panel. The front plate 9 is provided with a horizontally long rectangular display window 11, and inside the display window 11, as shown in FIG. 4, a rotating reel for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols in a predetermined order. Left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are arranged. The left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R form a symbol display means having a plurality of variable display columns for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols. Each forms one variable display column.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R include, for example, "7", "BAR", "Bell", "Cherry", "R1", and "R2". A total of 21 types of symbols are provided in a predetermined arrangement. In FIG. 2, for simplicity of explanation, only symbols of reels necessary for explanation of the present embodiment are shown. In addition, frame numbers from 0 to 20 are sequentially assigned to the respective symbols of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R. For example, symbols from frame numbers 0 to 20 are printed. A reel tape is stuck on the peripheral surface of the reel to form left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R. When the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R rotate, a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed on the display window 11 in a predetermined order of frame numbers 20, 19,..., 0, 20,. Variable display.

  When the rotation of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is stopped, a total of nine symbols, three for each of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R, peek from the display window 11. Specifically, three reels, one each for the upper, middle, and lower tiers, and a total of nine reels for the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are displayed through the display window 11 for each reel. That is, when all of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R stop, a total of nine symbols arranged in three columns and three rows are stopped and displayed on the display window 11. In this embodiment, among the symbols displayed on the display window 11, one line (middle line) composed of the middle symbol of the left reel 13L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 13M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 13R is a winning line. When the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R stop in a state where the winning combination is aligned on the winning line, a winning is achieved.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 3, left, middle, and right reel motors 14L, 14M, and 14R each including a stepping motor are connected to each of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R. -The middle and right reels 13L, 13M, 13R are independently driven to rotate.

  Returning to FIG. 1, a bet switch 15 for instructing the player to insert one medal (game value) from among the credit medals stored therein is provided on the operation plate 7, and the player receives the credit medal. From the maximum bet switch 17 for instructing the insertion of the maximum number of inserted medals (set to 3) per game (game), and the player rotates each of the reels 13L, 13M, 13R. A lever-shaped start switch 19 for performing an operation for starting the variable display of each symbol, and for the player to stop the rotation of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R to stop the variable display of each symbol. , Left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R, respectively. Adjusting switch 23 for instructing payout of dull and medal slot 25, it is provided. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that one medal insertion number (specified number) required for one game (game) is set to one of three. Thus, it is possible to play a game using the game value. In the present embodiment, the slot machine 1 using medals as a gaming value will be described as an example of the gaming machine according to the present invention, but not limited to medals, but other gaming media or electronic data may be used as the gaming value. The present invention may be applied to a gaming machine.

  In addition, at the approximate center of the upper part of the front plate 9, a moving image or the like is displayed to notify the player of a winning or a prize, and a left / middle / right stop switch 21L, 21M, 21R required to win the prize. A liquid crystal display 27 for performing an effect of notifying an operation mode is provided. Immediately above the liquid crystal display 27, an explanation panel 29 on which various winning symbols are displayed is provided. Speakers 31L and 31R for performing effects such as music and voice are provided on the left and right sides of the explanation panel 29, respectively. Note that speakers 31L and 31R are also provided on the left and right sides of a medal payout port 39 described later.

  Further, a central lamp portion 33M is provided on the upper side of the explanation panel 29 and the speakers 31L and 31R, and left and right lamp portions 33L and 33R are provided on the left and right sides, respectively. A light source such as a light emitting diode is disposed in each of the center, left, and right lamp units 33M, 33L, and 33R. These center / left / right ramps 33M, 33L, 33R are integrally formed and constitute an upper ramp 33 for performing an effect such as notifying a player of winning or winning.

  A lower panel 35 on which a decorative image or the like is displayed is provided below the operation plate 7. On the left and right sides of the lower panel 35, a lower lamp unit in which a plurality of light sources are arranged, for example, in two rows. 37L and 37R are provided. Below the lower panel 35, a medal payout port 39 and a medal receiver 41 for receiving medals paid out from the medal payout port 39 are provided. Further, a figure (not shown) indicating the position of the winning line for the three reels is drawn in the lower right corner of the front panel 9, and the CPU 61 mounted on the main control board 63 of FIG. In response to the above display control, a credit indicator 45 for displaying the number of stored credit medals and a payout indicator 46 for displaying the number of paid medals are provided. The credit indicator 45 is composed of, for example, two 7-segment displays, and is capable of displaying a 2-digit stored number (up to 50). The payout indicator 46 is composed of, for example, two 7-segment displays, and can display a 2-digit payout number. The seven-segment display has a total of eight segments formed by combining a bar-shaped seven-segment arranged in the shape of “8” and one small round segment serving as a decimal point. Each segment is constituted by a light emitting diode (see FIG. 13). Here, the payout display 46 is also used to display an error code corresponding to the error that has occurred, and the tens and / or ones dots of the payout display 46 (lightable locations DP in FIG. 13) are The section is also used as the advantageous section lamp 47 (see FIG. 3), and is lit in an AT allowable state in which an AT game that allows the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R to be specified in an advantageous manner can be specified. (Advantageous section), and turning off the light indicates that it is not an advantageous section. However, the advantageous section lamp may be configured as a separate component from the payout indicator 46, for example, the dot portion of the credit indicator 45 may be used, or another lamp member may be used.

  Although not shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. 4, a support frame 13 that supports the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is fixed to a rear wall in the housing 3. Below the support frame 13 in the housing 3, a hopper unit 43 for discharging medals to a medal payout port 39 is provided. Further, on the back side near the medal slot 25, as shown in FIG. 4, it is determined whether or not the medal inserted into the medal slot 25 is a regular one, and only the regular medal is transmitted to the hopper unit 43. A guiding medal selector 48 is provided. Note that a medal passage (not shown) is provided inside the housing 3, and medals excluded as irregular medals by the medal selector 48 and medals paid out from the hopper unit 43 pass through the medal passage. Payout from the medal payout exit 39. Specifically, in the medal selector 48, although not particularly shown, the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 25 is stored in the hopper unit 43 by operating the rail unit by driving the cancel coil using the electromagnet. The passage and the passage for proceeding from the medal payout port 39 to the medal receiver 41 are formed so as to be switchable. Thereby, it is possible to switch between storing the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 25 as credit medals or paying out to the medal receiver 41. However, for example, when the number of stored medals reaches the maximum stored number or during a game, the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 25 is discharged to the medal payout port 39 without operating the rail unit by driving the cancel coil. In other cases, the rail portion operates by the driving of the cancel coil under the drive control of the main CPU 61 mounted on the main control board 63 of FIG. Then, only the regular medals are guided to the hopper unit 43.

  As shown in FIG. 3, an insertion sensor 53 is provided in a medal selector 48 near the medal insertion slot 25 inside the housing 3, and the insertion sensor 53 detects medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 25 one by one. . The insertion sensor 53 is formed by providing three selector sensors A, B, and C in a medal passage. The inserted medals are arranged in the order of the selector sensor C, the selector sensor A, and the selector sensor B. And a predetermined range of time intervals (timing). A payout sensor 54 is provided at the exit of the hopper unit 43, and the payout sensor 54 detects medals to be paid out to the medal payout port 39 one by one. The payout sensor 54 includes a payout sensor A and a payout sensor B that are arranged at a predetermined distance. In the timing chart at the time of medal passing in a normal state, both the payout sensors A and B can shift to the on state when the hopper motor 57 is being driven (on state). Further, the payout sensor B is set to shift twice from the off state to the on state. When the payout sensor B is in the first on state, the payout sensor A shifts from the off state to the on state. In the second ON state of B, the dispensing sensor A is set so as to shift from the ON state to the OFF state.

  As shown in FIG. 3, an operation box 50 is provided, and a power switch 50a for turning on and off the power, a key cylinder type setting change key switch 50b, and a push button type setting change button 50c (reset switch) are provided. ) Is provided. Further, since the operation box 50 is disposed inside the housing 3, it cannot be operated unless the front door 5 is opened. It should be noted that the setting change is performed by setting a winning probability set value (set from setting 1) to be used when selecting one of a plurality of lottery tables 671 (see FIG. 7) having different degrees of advantage at the time of winning lottery. This is a process for setting 6).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a set value display 56 is provided. The set value display 56 is constituted by, for example, one 7-segment display, and a set value of one digit winning probability (specifically, , 1 to 6). The seven-segment display has a total of eight segments formed by combining a bar-shaped seven-segment arranged in the shape of “8” and one small round segment serving as a decimal point. Each segment is constituted by a light emitting diode (see FIG. 13). The set value display 56 displays the set value of the slot machine 1. The set value display 56 is provided inside the housing 3, specifically, on the back of the front door 5, so as not to be visible from the outside. After setting the set value, the display is deleted.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a door sensor (door opening / closing switch) 58 is provided. The door sensor 58 is provided on the housing 3 side and determines whether the front door 5 is closed. It is a sensor for detecting whether or not. For example, when the front door 5 is closed, the door sensor 58 is turned on (ON state) by the contact sensor when the rear surface of the front door 5 and the front surface of the door sensor 58 come close to each other. As the door is opened, the back surface of the front door 5 is separated from the front surface of the door sensor 58, and is turned off (OFF state) by the contact sensor. Of course, the present invention is not limited to the contact sensor, and the opening and closing of the front door 5 may be detected by an optical sensor, a magnetic sensor, or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 3, left, center, and right position sensors 55L, 55M, and 55R that detect the rotational positions of the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are provided. The position sensors 55L, 55M, and 55R include, for example, photointerrupters that detect protrusions provided on the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R, respectively, when the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R rotate. , And detects the protruding portion for each rotation, and outputs a detection signal to the main CPU 61 of the main control board 63. In the present embodiment, for example, when the left / middle / right position sensors 55L, 55M, and 55R detect the protrusions, the design with the frame number 20 is located in the middle of the display window 11, respectively.

  The hopper motor 57 shown in FIG. 3 is disposed in the hopper unit 43 and pays out medals toward the medal payout port 39 by driving the hopper motor 57. The overflow sensor 57a is provided in the vicinity of an auxiliary tank for storing medals overflowing from the medal tank for storing medals of the hopper unit 43. The overflow sensor 57a detects that the medals in the auxiliary tank are full. It outputs a signal to the main CPU 61 of the control board 63.

  Further, an external concentrated terminal plate 59 is provided inside the housing 3. The external centralized terminal board 59 outputs game data to the outside of the slot machine 1, and is connected to a connection terminal (connector) wired to the main CPU 61 of the main control board 63, and to an external device (not shown). This is a terminal plate provided with connection terminals (connectors). Although not shown, the external centralized terminal board 59 is connected to a game island facility (for example, a data display) or a hall computer.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control board 63 on which a main CPU 61 for controlling the progress of the game is mounted, and effects control in accordance with the progress of the game based on information transmitted from the main control board 63 are performed. The sub-control board 73 on which the sub-CPU 71 is mounted is separately provided, and various data are transmitted from the main control board 63 to the sub-control board 73 in one direction. In addition, the main control board 63 is housed in a board case so as to prevent unauthorized access from the outside, and is tightly sealed so that the board case cannot be opened without leaving any trace. I have. In addition, various measures have been taken on the board case so that it can be visually confirmed that the board case has been illegally opened.

  An RWM (read / write memory) 65 of the main control board 63 is a storage capacity inside the main CPU 61 and temporarily stores data related to a game such as a game state of the slot machine 1. The ROM 67 of the main control board 63 is a storage capacity inside the main CPU 61 and stores a game machine program (a program for the slot machine 1) including preset data.

  By the way, the ROM 67 has a capacity of, for example, 16 KB (kilobytes), and a 7.5 KB area (program area 4.5 KB + data area 3 KB) starting from the address 0000H stores programs relating to the progress of the game and various tables 671, 672, Used to store required data. Further, as will be described later in detail, in the area of 4.35 KB of the remaining 8.5 KB starting from address 1E50H of the ROM 67, the total number of paid out medals per 400 games is monitored in order to monitor the payout history of medals. Are used to store a game information monitoring program and data, such as the total number of medals paid out in the last 6000 games, the total number of medals paid out after installation or after RWM clear, for the 15 sets.

  The RWM 65 has a capacity of 1024 B (bytes), and an area of 512 B starting from the address F000H is used for temporarily storing various data necessary for executing a program relating to the progress of the game. Further, as will be described in detail later, in order to monitor the medal game history in the unused area of the remaining 512B starting from the address F200H of the RWM 65, 15 sets of the total payout number of medals for every 400 games are monitored. Various data (see FIGS. 11 and 12) relating to game information such as the total number of medals paid out in the 6000 game, the total number of medals paid out after installation or after RWM clear are stored.

  As shown in FIG. 5, on one surface 63A of the main control board 63 (the component mounting surface of the main control board 63), a ratio display (role ratio monitor) 69 including four display components is provided. Have been. As shown in FIG. 4, the ratio indicator 69 is mounted on the main control board 63 in a board case installed inside the housing 3 and above the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R. Then, when the front door 5 is opened, it is arranged at a position that can be visually recognized from the outside. As shown in FIG. 6, the ratio display 69 includes four 7-segment displays Sd, which are display components. The 7-segment displays Sd are formed in a bar shape and arranged in the shape of “8”. There are a total of eight segments obtained by combining the seven segments obtained and one small round segment serving as a decimal point, and each segment is constituted by a light emitting diode (see FIG. 13). Switch control is performed by the main CPU 61 to control turning on and off of the light emitting diode, and VDD and GND are supplied to at least one of the anode and the cathode of the light emitting diode via a switch. In FIG. 5, CS is a transparent resin substrate case housing the main control substrate 63, K is a caulking portion for sealing the substrate case CS, and CN is a connector. The arrangement of components (connector, ratio display, main CPU, IC, etc.) in FIG. 5 will be described later in detail.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 6, each of the seven-segment displays Sd constituting the ratio display 69 is such that adjacent seven-segment displays Sd are arranged side by side at a predetermined interval, and the main display is located between the adjacent seven-segment displays Sd. A gap Gp through which one surface 63A of the control board 63 can be seen is provided. As described above, by providing the gap Gp between the adjacent 7-segment displays Sd, the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and the surface of the ratio display 69 facing the one surface 63A (the lower surface of the ratio display 69). Even if a fraudulent component Wc (indicated by a one-dot chain line in FIG. 6) that causes a slot machine such as a fraudulent IC to perform a fraudulent game operation is mounted, one surface 63A side of the main control board 63 via the gap Gp. Therefore, it is possible to easily find an illicit component Wc such as an illicit IC hidden on the lower surface of the ratio display 69, and to prevent the mounting of the illicit component Wc. Note that among the four 7-segment displays Sd, a gap Gp may be provided between at least one pair of adjacent 7-segment displays Sd, and it is not necessary to provide a gap Gp between all adjacent 7-segment displays Sd. .

  Further, the connection terminal T of each of the seven-segment displays Sd is soldered to a wiring pattern formed on the other surface opposite to the one surface 63A of the main control board 63. Is desirably arranged on the side surface on the gap Gp side as shown in FIG. In this case, the connection terminal T of the seven-segment display Sd is in the way, so that the one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and the one surface 63A of the ratio indicator 69 composed of four seven-segment displays Sd face ( Unauthorized components such as unauthorized ICs cannot be mounted on the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69), so that mounting of an unauthorized component on the lower surface of the ratio indicator 69 can be reliably prevented.

  Returning to FIG. 3, the main CPU 61 of the main control board 63 has an interrupt function such as a timer interrupt, and executes a game machine program stored in the ROM 67 to control the progress of the game. Perform processing. Then, the main CPU 61 stores data on the result of the lottery in the lottery process by the later-described lottery means 103, data on the operation of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R, the start switch 19, etc. operated by the player. Are transmitted to the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71) in a command format.

  The sub-control board 73 includes a memory 75 having an RWM section for temporarily storing various data and a ROM section for storing various programs for production. Further, the sub CPU 71 of the sub control board 73 has an interrupt function such as a timer interrupt, and the sub CPU 71 transmits various data regarding the slot machine 1 transmitted from the main CPU 61 (in the lottery process by the role lottery means 103 described later). By executing a program stored in the memory 75 based on the role lottery result, data on whether operating devices such as the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R and the start switch 19 have been operated, the game is executed. Determine the contents of the production related to the game to be offered to the player. Further, the sub CPU 71 of the sub control board 73 controls the effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 27 and the speakers 31L and 31R via the I / O port of the sub control board 73 based on the determined effect. I do.

(Main control board)
Next, the configuration of the main control board 63 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 7, the main control board 63 has various functions realized by executing a program stored in the ROM 67 and various functions realized by controlling hardware. .

(1) Game control means 100
The game control means 100 of FIG. 7 controls the game of the slot machine 1 and executes a normal game which is a general game and a special game which is a game more advantageous to the player than the normal game. As shown in FIG. 2, the game device includes an operation mode determination unit 100a and a game state setting unit 100b.

a) Operation mode determination means 100a
The operation mode determining means 100a in FIG. 7 determines the presence or absence of a player's operation on the slot machine 1 and the mode such as long press. Specifically, the bet switch 15, the maximum bet switch 17, the start switch 19, the left Various operations on the slot machine 1 by the player, such as the mode of operation of various switches such as the middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R by the player, and the mode of operation of inserting a medal into the medal slot 25 by the player. Is determined.

b) Game state setting means 100b
The game state setting means 100b shown in FIG. 7 is a symbol determination means for determining the result of the lottery processing by the combination lottery means 103 described later and the display mode of the symbols of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R displayed on the display window 11. The game state of the slot machine 1 is set to one of a plurality of game states set in advance based on the result of the determination made by the game machine 109 or the like.

  Specifically, in the normal game state in which the normal game is executed, a predetermined special combination (BB, CB) is won (if "7-7-7" is arranged on the winning line, a BB winning is achieved, and "7-7-7" is displayed on the winning line). When "BAR-BAR-BAR" is completed, when the CB wins), the gaming state setting means 100b sets the gaming state of the slot machine 1 to a special gaming state in which a special game is executed. In the special game state, if a predetermined number of medals are paid out or a predetermined number of games (games) are executed, and the special game end condition is satisfied, the special game is terminated and the slot machine is terminated. The first game state is set to the normal game state by the game state setting means 100b.

  Further, in the normal gaming state, when the special role is not won even though the special role is won, that is, each symbol corresponding to the special role is set to one line in the middle row of the display window 11. If the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are not stopped so as to be displayed on the line (center line), the gaming state of the slot machine 1 is changed to the internal winning where the internal winning game is executed. The middle game state is set by the game state setting means 100b. Further, in the gaming state during the internal winning, by winning a special combination carried over without winning, the gaming state of the slot machine 1 is set to the special gaming state by the gaming state setting means 100b.

  Here, an outline of a game in the slot machine 1 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the slot machine 1 executes a game by inserting three medals, and the insertion sensor 53, the bet switch 15 or the maximum bet switch 17 causes the three medals to be inserted into the slot machine 1. When the insertion is detected, a winning line (center line) in the middle of the display window 11 becomes valid. Then, when the operation of the start switch 19 is detected on condition that three medals, which are the specified number, are inserted, any one of the preset lottery results is determined by lottery processing using random numbers. 103. In addition, all the rotations of the left, center and right reels 13L, 13M and 13R are started, and the symbols of the left, center and right reels 13L, 13M and 13R displayed on the display window 11 are displayed on the left, center and right reels 13L and 13R. The determination starts in accordance with the rotation angles of 13M and 13R.

  Thereafter, the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R accelerate to a state where all the operations of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R can be effectively received. After the operation of all the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R is enabled, for example, when it is detected that the left stop switch 21L has been operated, the left reel 13L is stopped, and the middle stop switch 21M is operated. When it is detected that the right reel switch 13R is operated, the middle reel 13M is stopped, and when it is detected that the right stop switch 21R is operated, the right reel 13R is stopped. Thus, the operation of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R stops the rotation of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R corresponding to the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R. I do.

  When all the operations of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are completed, all the rotations of the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R are stopped. At this time, when the symbol of the predetermined winning combination determined by the role lottery means 103 stops at a predetermined position on the winning line in the middle stage of the display window 11 that has become effective, a winning is achieved, and the number of medals according to the winning mode is obtained. Is credited or paid out from the medal payout exit 39, and one game ends. In addition, a predetermined profit may be given to the player instead of or together with the payout of the medal.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, special roles (bonus: BB, CB), small roles (middle bell, single sheets 1 to 12, middle cherries), and replays (replays 1 to 8) are performed as roles. Is set in advance. In the present embodiment, different combinations (“middle bell”, “single-piece combination 1” to “single-piece combination 12”, “replay 1” to “replay 8”) can be arranged as the combination lottery result depending on the operation mode. There is a possibility of winning with a potential duplicate win (winning role group: left bell, middle bell, right bell, common bell 2, replay). The role lottery results of the role lottery means 103 include a special role winning (bonus winning), a small role winning, a replay winning (replay winning), and a loss.

  In addition, the prize includes a special role prize (bonus prize) related to the transition to a special game (bonus game), a small role prize related to the payout of medals, and a replay game prize (replay) related to execution of a replay (replay). Replay winning).

  Then, for example, when three symbols of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are aligned on the pay line in each of the display modes related to the roles "BB" and "CB" in FIG. Then, a bonus game (special game) is executed.

  In the present embodiment, there is no payout of medals due to the special role prize (the number of special payouts of the special role is 0), and the game is shifted to the bonus game after the game in which the prize mode relating to the special role is established. However, a predetermined number of payouts (for example, 10) may be set as the special combination, and the game may be shifted to the bonus game after paying out medals.

  In addition, for example, in each of the display modes related to the combination “Middle Bell”, “Single Role 1” to “Single Role 12”, and “Middle Cherry” in FIG. 8, each of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R When three symbols are aligned on the winning line in the middle of the display window 11, a small winning combination is won, and medals of the number shown in the "payout number" column are paid out.

  In addition, in FIG. 8, “any” used as a display mode related to the winning of the role “middle cherry” may be any symbol provided on the middle reel 13M and the right reel 13R, which may be arranged on the winning line. Means that.

  In addition, in the display mode relating to the roles “Replay 1” to “Replay 8” in FIG. 8, when three symbols of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are aligned on the winning line, a replaying game winning is achieved. The player can play the game again under the same conditions as the previous game without inserting a new medal.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, it is configured such that a plurality of wins can be simultaneously won by the win lottery means 103. That is, as shown in FIG. 9, a winning combination group (combination lottery result) composed of a plurality of combinations is formed, and the combination lottery means 103 determines whether or not each winning combination group has been won. Among the winning role groups, the winning role groups “Left Bell”, “Middle Bell”, “Right Bell” (hereinafter the winning role groups “Left Bell”, “Middle Bell”, “Right Bell” ). "The common bell 2" includes a plurality of winning combinations. Specifically, the winning combination group “left bell” is composed of “middle bell” and “one sheet role 1” to “one sheet role 4”, and the winning combination group “middle bell” is “middle bell”, The winning role group “Right Bell” is composed of “Single Role 5” to “Single Role 8”, and the winning role group is composed of “Middle Bell” and “Single Role 9” to “Single Role 12”. The group “Common Bell 2” is composed of “Middle Bell” and “Single Sheet 1”.

  Therefore, if the winning lottery means 103 described later determines that the winning role group "Left Bell" has been won, it means that the "Middle Bell" and "One-Piece Role 1" to "One-Piece Role 4" are simultaneously won. Therefore, if it is determined that the winning combination group "Middle Bell" has been won, it means that the "Middle Bell" and "One-Piece Role 5" to "One-Piece Role 8" have been simultaneously won, and the winning role group "Right Bell" ”, It means that“ Middle Bell ”and“ One-Piece Role 9 ”to“ One-Piece Role 12 ”have been simultaneously won, and it is determined that the winning role group“ Common Bell 2 ”has been won. If this is the case, it means that "Middle Bell" and "One-Piece Role 1" have been won at the same time.

  In the present embodiment, the winning combination groups “left bell”, “middle bell”, and “right bell” respectively have left, middle, and right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R that are advantageous to the player. Push order) is set in advance, and as shown in the column of “Remarks” in FIG. 9, even if the role lottery result (winning role group) by the role lottery means 103 is the same, the player is left The reel rotation control means 106 stops the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R so that the winning mode (display mode) differs depending on the order in which the middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are operated. It is configured to control.

  That is, by winning one of the winning combination groups “left bell”, “middle bell”, and “right bell” shown in FIG. 9, when a plurality of roles are simultaneously won, the left / middle / right The reel rotation control means 106 is configured so that, among the winning combinations, the role of preferentially aligning the symbols related to the winning on the winning line differs according to the operation order of the stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R. .

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, for example, when the role lottery result by the role lottery means 103 is the winning combination group “left bell”, the operation mode determination means 100a firstly causes the left stop switch 21L to be operated. Is determined to have been performed, the symbol "Bell" which is a display mode corresponding to the winning combination "middle bell" which is most advantageous to the player is displayed in a state where the symbol is aligned on the winning line. Then, the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are stopped and controlled by the reel rotation control means 106.

  On the other hand, when the operation mode determination means 100a first determines that the left stop switch 21L has not been operated, the symbol "Bell" which is a display mode corresponding to the winning combination "middle bell" is aligned on the winning line. The symbol is not displayed in the state in which it is in the closed state. That is, the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are operated in a preset operation order corresponding to the winning combination group (“left bell”, “middle bell”, “right bell”). Unless determined by the operation mode determination unit 100a, the symbols are not displayed in the display mode corresponding to the winning combination that is most advantageous for the players included in the winning combination group.

  By winning in the winning combination group “Common Bell 2” shown in FIG. 9 and simultaneously winning a plurality of roles, as shown in the “Remarks” column of FIG. 9, the left / middle / right stop switch Regardless of the operation order of 21L, 21M, and 21R, the symbol "Bell" which is a display mode corresponding to the winning combination "middle bell" among the winning combinations is displayed in a state of being aligned on the winning line. The left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are controlled to stop by the reel rotation control means 106.

  By the way, the special game (bonus game) is a game in which the winning probability of the small role is set higher than that of the normal game, and is a game that is easy to receive game medals and is advantageous to the player compared to the normal game. Yes, this is a game in which the player can get more medals.

  When the game shifts to the special game state by winning the special combination “BB” in FIG. 8, a big bonus game is executed. In the big bonus game, a regular bonus game is continuously executed. In the regular bonus game, the lottery table 671 that defines the winning probability of the lottery process by the role lottery means 103 is determined from the normal game lottery table selected in the normal game by the winning probability of the lottery process by the role lottery means 103 of the normal game. By switching to the special game lottery table defined with a higher probability than in the case, the winning probability of the small role is set to be higher than during the normal game. As a result, the special game is a game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. Then, after shifting to the regular bonus game, if the game is played a preset number of times, for example, seven times, the regular bonus game ends. Then, after shifting to the big bonus game, when a predetermined number of medals are paid out, the big bonus game ends. That is, in the present embodiment, the big bonus game is set to end the special game (big bonus game) and shift to the normal game when the number of paid-out medals in the big bonus game reaches a predetermined upper limit number. ing.

  Further, when the special game state is entered by winning the special combination "CB" in FIG. 8, a challenge bonus game is executed. In the challenge bonus game, all the winning combinations are achieved, and the state in which the pull-in range of the left reel 13L is smaller than usual continues up to the specified number of payouts. Then, after shifting to the challenge bonus game, if a predetermined number of medals are paid out, the challenge bonus game ends.

  When the result of the lottery of the role lottery means 103 is a special role winning (BB, CB), the stop control of the symbols based on the special role winning is performed. At this time, the symbol arrangement of the winning pattern of the special role is allocated. If not, the game state shifts to the gaming state during the internal winning, and the special role winning is carried over until the symbol arrangement of the winning mode of the special role is allocated.

  On the other hand, if the small lottery result is a small lottery winning game and the symbol arrangement of the winning combination of the small role is not allocated to the game, the small lottery result is not carried over to the next game. Also, in the case of a replay winning, a symbol related to any one of “Replay 1” to “Replay 8” always wins, regardless of the timing at which the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are operated. Since the symbols are arranged on the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R so as to be aligned on the line, the player always wins the re-game combination.

  By the way, in a case where one of the winning combination groups “left bell”, “middle bell”, and “right bell” is won, the left / middle / right stop switch 21L is at any timing similar to the symbol related to the replay. , 21M, 21R are operated, the symbols ("Bell", "R1", "R2") related to the winning combination groups "left bell", "middle bell", and "right bell" are always aligned on the winning line. Since the symbols of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are arranged as described above, the player always wins any one of the "middle bell" and the "single-piece combination 1" to the "single-piece combination 12". That is, when one of the winning combination groups “left bell”, “middle bell”, and “right bell” is won and left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R are operated, left / middle / middle Regardless of the timing at which the right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are operated, the left, center, and right reels are such that the symbols (see FIG. 8) relating to the winning corresponding to each operation mode are aligned on the winning line. 13L, 13M, 13R are stopped and controlled by the reel rotation control means 106.

  Further, in the case of the winning of the winning combination group “common bell 2”, as described above, the winning combination “middle bell” is given priority regardless of the operation order of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R. The symbols on the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are arranged so that the symbol ("Bell") related to the winning combination "Middle Bell" is always aligned on the winning line, so the "Middle Bell" is always won. I do. That is, if the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are operated when the winning combination group “common bell 2” is won, what are the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R? Even if operated at the timing, the reel rotation control means 106 controls the stop of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R so that the symbols (see FIG. 8) relating to the winning combination "middle bell" are aligned on the winning line. You.

  In addition, in the game in the AT non-permissible state, the gaming state setting means 100b determines whether or not to shift from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state based on the role lottery result of the role lottery means 103 described later. From the game following the game, an AT allowed state is set. In the present embodiment, the gaming state setting means 100b always determines to shift from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permitted state when the winning combination groups "Middle Cherry" and "Common Bell 1" are won. Then, the game state setting means 100b gives a preset number (for example, 20) as the number of games in the AT allowable state, sets the number in the AT remaining game number counter 654, and sets an AT (assist time) period from the next game. And the AT game is executed. In the AT game, when one of the winning combination groups “left bell”, “middle bell”, and “right bell” is won, the type of the winning combination group (“left bell”, “middle bell”, “right bell” ) Is notified to the player (which stop switch should be operated first). Note that even if the winning combination group “Middle Cherry” or “Common Bell 1” is won in the AT non-permissible state, the state may not be shifted to the AT permitted state with a certain probability.

  In addition, in the game in the AT allowed state, the game state setting means 100b sets the game in the AT allowed state when one of the winning combination groups “Middle Cherry”, “Replay”, “Common Bell 2”, and “CB” is won. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to add a number, and the number of games (may be 0) according to the lottery result is added to the AT remaining game number counter 654. The game state setting means 100b decrements the AT remaining game number counter 654 by one for each game regardless of whether the AT game is performed in the AT allowable state. Further, the game state setting means 100b sets the AT continuous game number counter 655 to a predetermined number (for example, 1500) as the maximum number of games in one AT allowable state when it is determined to shift from the AT non-permissible state to the AT allowable state. Is set, and the AT continuous game number counter 655 is decremented by 1 every game regardless of whether the AT game is performed in the AT allowable state. The game state setting means 100b wins a drop lottery to determine whether or not to fall from the AT permitted state to the AT non-permitted state after the AT remaining game number counter 654 becomes 0, or the AT continuous game number counter 655 becomes 0. Is set to the AT non-permissible state from the game next to the game that has become.

(2) Setting control means 101
The setting control means 101 in FIG. 7 sets a set value (setting 1 to setting 6). This set value is for selecting a lottery table 671 selected by the table selecting means 102 described later, and one of the set values is associated with each of the plurality of lottery tables 671 stored in the ROM 67. ing. The setting control means 101 determines the on / off state of the setting change key switch 50b when the power is turned on, and when the power is turned on while the setting change key switch 50b is on, starts a predetermined setting change process.

  In the present embodiment, the winning probability in the lottery of the normal game is set in a plurality of stages distinguished by a plurality of types of setting values (here, six types), and the lottery table 671 (normal (A game lottery table). Then, when the setting change process is started, the manager of the pachinko hall in which the slot machine 1 is installed can change the set value.

  For example, in the normal gaming state of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, the winning combination groups “left bell”, “middle bell”, “right bell”, “middle cherry”, “common bell 1”, “BB” , “Replay”, the winning probability is the same for each setting value, and for the winning combination groups “Common Bell 2” and “CB”, the higher the setting, the higher the winning probability. (Normal game lottery table) is set. According to the lottery table 671, the winning combination groups “Middle Cherry” and “Common Bell 1” related to the transition to the AT allowable state have no difference in the winning probabilities. There is no set value difference for the transition probability to. On the other hand, the winning combination groups “common bell 2” and “CB”, which are AT right granters, have higher winning probabilities as the higher the setting, the higher the setting, the greater the chance of extending (adding) the AT period. Many have been obtained.

  The procedure for changing the set value is performed, for example, as follows. The administrator opens the front door 5, inserts a setting change key (not shown) into the key cylinder and turns the setting change key switch 50b while the power switch 50a is OFF, and turns on the setting change key switch 50b. In this state, the setting change process is started by turning on the power switch 50a.

  Then, the set value of the winning probability is cyclically switched from setting 1 to setting 6 each time the administrator operates the setting change button 50c. This set value is notified by displaying it on the set value display 56. When the set value of the winning probability reaches a desired value by operating the setting change button 50c, the set value is determined by operating the start switch 19. Then, when the setting change key inserted in the key cylinder is rotated to turn off the setting change key switch 50b, the setting change process ends. Thereafter, when a medal is inserted from, for example, the medal insertion slot 25, the game is started.

(3) Table selection means 102
The table selection means 102 in FIG. 7 includes the types of games (normal games, internally won games, special games, and the like) controlled by the game control means 100 on the main control board 63, and the set values (set by the setting control means 101). Based on the settings 1 to 6), one lottery table is selected from the plurality of lottery tables 671. That is, for example, in a normal game, the table selecting means 102 selects a lottery table 671 (a normal game lottery table) as a lottery table according to the set value (setting 1 to setting 6) of the winning probability.

(4) Role lottery means 103
The combination lottery means 103 of FIG. 7 uses the random number and the table selection means 102 to select one of a plurality of combination lottery results including a preset combination group winning and a loss as a combination lottery result in the current game. This is selected and determined by a lottery process using the selected lottery table 671. Here, in each lottery table 671, the correspondence between the random number value and each role lottery result is defined. Specifically, for example, in each lottery table 671, the random number generated by the random number generation means 103a described later is included. Data indicating an area where each of the lottery results is associated with each other in the entire range is stored.

a) Random number generating means 103a
The random number generating means 103a of FIG. 7 generates random numbers for lottery within a predetermined random number value range. The random number generating means 103a can be composed of, for example, an oscillating circuit and a counter circuit that counts a clock signal generated by the oscillating circuit (a so-called hard random number). The random number generating means 103a can be constituted by, for example, a means for generating random numbers by the average taking method or a means for generating random numbers by adding prime numbers. These means can be configured, for example, by causing the main CPU 61 to execute a predetermined program (so-called soft random numbers). Note that both a hard random number and a soft random number may be provided, and the random number may be generated in a software manner based on the result.

b) random number extracting means 103b
The random number extracting unit 103b in FIG. 7 extracts a random number value generated by the random number generating unit 103a, and extracts a random number value generated by the random number generating unit 103a under a predetermined condition. The random number extracting means 103b extracts a random number value used in the lottery processing of the combination lottery means 103 in the current game at the timing when the start switch 19 is operated.

  Further, since the random number generating means 103a is constituted by a counter circuit or the like, the numerical value generated by the random number generating means 103a is not strictly a random number. However, since the timing at which the start switch 19 is operated is considered to be random, the numerical value extracted by the random number extracting means 103b can be treated substantially as a random number.

c) Lottery result determination means 103c
The lottery result determination unit 103c in FIG. 7 determines the result of the lottery in the current game based on the random number value extracted by the random number extraction unit 103b in the current game and the game state in the current game. The lottery result determination unit 103c refers to the lottery table 671 corresponding to the current gaming state selected by the table selection unit 102, and the random number value extracted by the random number extraction unit 103b is defined by the lottery table 671. By determining to which region the random number value region corresponding to each role lottery result belongs, the role lottery result in the current game is determined.

(5) Reel detecting means 105
The reel detecting means 105 shown in FIG. 7 includes detection signals from the left / middle / right position sensors 55L, 55M, 55R, and left / middle / right reel motors 14L, 14M for driving the left / middle / right reels 13L, 13M, 13R. , And 14R, the rotational positions of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are detected. The reel detecting means 105 corresponds to a symbol located at a predetermined reference position (in the present embodiment, for example, the middle stage of the display window 11) while the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, 13R are rotating and when the rotation is stopped. Each frame number is detected.

(6) Reel rotation control means 106
The reel rotation control means 106 shown in FIG. 7 is configured to control the excitation phase of each of the reel motors 14L, 14M, 14R to individually control the rotation of each of the reels 13L, 13M, 13R. When the start switch 19 is operated by the player, the reel rotation control means 106 controls the excitation phase of each of the reel motors 14L, 14M, 14R to start the rotation of each of the reels 13L, 13M, 13R. The reel rotation control means 106 controls the stop of each of the left, middle and right reels 13L, 13M and 13R by using the stop table 672 based on the operation of each of the left, middle and right stop switches 21L, 21M and 21R. And the symbols variably displayed by the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are stopped in a display mode corresponding to the role lottery result of the role lottery means 103. The reel rotation control means 106 determines the combination of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means 103c and the operation mode of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R for each game, and the left / middle / right reel 13L. , 13M, 13R.

  As described in the “Remarks” column of FIG. 9, when a “bell group” (one of the winning combination groups “left bell”, “middle bell”, and “right bell”) is won. In accordance with the first stop switch to be operated, different combinations are set. Further, the advantageous operation mode differs depending on the type of the “bell group”.

  As the stop table 672 for determining the stop positions of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R, a plurality of tables are set corresponding to the respective role lottery results of the role lottery means 103. The stop table 672 stores the left, center, and right reels according to the rotation positions of the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R when the left, center, and right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R are operated. The number of sliding frames of 13L, 13M, and 13R is determined in advance. For each of the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R, the stop operation order of the corresponding left, middle, and right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R is determined. Correspondingly, the number of sliding frames is different.

  In addition, if the role lottery result of the role lottery means 103 is a win for one of the roles, the reel rotation control means 106 determines whether or not the stop table 672 selected based on the result of the role lottery result and the left / middle / right stop. From the rotational positions of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R when the switches 21L, 21M, and 21R are operated, respectively, the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are respectively set so as to win the winning combination. Is determined, and the stop control of each of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is performed. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery by the lottery means 103 is a loss, the reel rotation control means 106 determines the stop table 672 selected based on the result of the lottery of the loss, and the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, From the rotational positions of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R when the respective 21Rs are operated, each of the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is set so as not to win any of a plurality of roles. The number of sliding frames is determined, and stop control of each of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is performed.

  By the way, there is an upper limit on the number of sliding frames, and the left, middle, and right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the timing when the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, 13R are at predetermined rotation positions are respectively set. If no operation is performed, the reel rotation control unit 106 determines that the symbol displayed on the display window 11 corresponds to the winning combination even if the result of the lottery selection by the combination lottery unit 103 is a winning combination. The left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R cannot be stopped and controlled so as to be stopped and displayed in a manner. In other words, the reel rotation control means 106 determines the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R corresponding to the left, middle, and right reels at the respective predetermined rotational positions based on the result of the lottery of the role lottery means 103. On condition that the right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are operated, the symbols displayed on the display window 11 are stopped and displayed in a winning mode corresponding to the winning combination, so that the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M and 13R are controlled to stop.

(7) Notification determining means 107
The notification determining means 107 in FIG. 7 determines whether to notify the operation mode of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R that are advantageous to the player. For example, even if the role lottery result is “Right Bell”, if it is not possible to know that, the player does not always operate the right stop switch 21R first, and “Middle Bell” They cannot always be aligned. On the other hand, in the AT game, when the lottery result is “Right Bell”, the fact is notified and the player is prompted to operate the right stop switch 21R first, thereby increasing the chance of the player receiving the payout. It becomes possible.

  Here, “Middle Cherry”, “Common Bell 1”, and “Common Bell 2”, which are transitions to the AT permitted state in which the lottery of the AT game can be performed, are won, and the transition to the AT permitted state is performed by the gaming state setting means 100b. Is determined, the notification determining means 107 determines that notification is to be performed. Then, the notification determining unit 107 sets the state of the flag during the AT period stored in the flag storage unit 651 to ON, for example, after paying out medals. When the AT remaining game number counter 654 or the AT continuous game number counter 655 becomes 0, the notification determining means 107 sets the flag during the AT period to OFF after paying out medals, for example. Regarding the flag, one of the bits forming the flag storage unit 651 is assigned to the flag during the AT period, and ON / OFF of the bit is set, so that the state of the flag during the AT period is stored in the flag storage unit. 651.

  Then, in the AT game, when one of the winning combination groups “left bell”, “middle bell”, and “right bell” is won, an operation mode advantageous to the player preset for each winning combination group ( The operation order is notified to the player.

  Further, as described later, the command creating unit 108 creates a command according to the determination result of the notification determining unit 107. The notification determining unit 107 determines whether the command created by the command creating unit 108 is a command that can identify the type of the selected bell group (a command that indicates an advantageous operation mode) or a command that cannot identify the type of the selected bell group. (A command for which an advantageous operation mode is not known).

(8) Command creation means 108
The command creating unit 108 in FIG. 7 includes data relating to the result of the lottery in the lottery process by the lottery lottery unit 103, and the operating devices operated by the player such as the left, middle, and right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R, and the start switch 19. A command for transmitting various data such as operation-related data to the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71) is generated. The command generated by the command creation unit 108 is transmitted to the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71) by the sub control command transmission unit 111 as described later.

  The command creation unit 108 creates a command including “0” to “10” as a command that can identify the result of the lottery when the lottery by the lottery unit 103 is executed. As described later, the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71) selects an effect to be executed based on the transmitted command. In other words, the command creating unit 108 creates a command for instructing the effect content to be executed on the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71).

  Then, when the notification determination means 107 determines that the operation mode advantageous to the player is not to be notified, that is, when the flag during the AT period is set to OFF, the command creation means 108 selects one of the "bell groups". Although it can be identified that the crab has been won, a command is created which does not include data indicating the type of the winning role group ("left bell", "middle bell", "right bell") and cannot identify the corresponding winning group. . Further, when the notification determining means 107 determines that the operation mode advantageous to the player is to be notified, that is, when the flag is set to ON during the AT period, the selected winning combination groups (“left bell”, “middle”) A command that includes data indicating the type of “bell” and “right bell” and that can identify the relevant winning combination group is created.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, when the flag during the AT period is OFF, the command creating unit 108 wins any of the winning combination groups “left bell”, “middle bell”, and “right bell”. Even in this case, the same command “No. 1” is created so that any winning combination group of “Bell group” cannot be identified. On the other hand, when the flag is ON during the AT period, the command creating means 108 outputs the command of “No. 2” when the “left bell” is won, and the command of “No. 3” when the “bell” is won. Is created as the “right bell”, a command of “No. 4” is created.

  In addition, the command creating unit 108 creates the same command for the other lottery results regardless of whether the flag during the AT period is ON or OFF. For example, if the "Cherry Cherry" has been won, the command "No. 5", if the "BB" has been won, the command "No. 6", if the "CB" has been won, the command "No. 7" If the player has won the “Replay”, a command “No. 8” is created. If the player has won the “Common Bell 1”, the command “No. 9” has been created. No. command. In the case of a loss, a command of “No. 0” is created.

(9) Symbol determination means 109
The symbol judging means (corresponding to “winning judging means”) 109 in FIG. 7 is based on the rotation positions of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R detected by the reel detecting means 105, based on the respective rotation positions. It is determined whether or not the display mode of the symbol by each of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R stopped by the stop control is a predetermined display mode.

  The symbol determination means 109 determines that the special combination has been won when the symbols are aligned on the winning line in the display mode shown in the combination of "BB" and "CB" in FIG. When the symbols are aligned on the winning line in the display mode shown in “Middle Bell”, “Single Role 1” to “Single Role 12”, and “Middle Cherry” in FIG. When the symbols are determined to be awarded, and the symbols are aligned on the winning line in the display modes shown in “Replay 1” to “Replay 8” in FIG.

(10) Payout control means 110
The payout control unit 110 of FIG. 7 gives a predetermined profit to the player based on the result of the determination by the symbol determination unit 109. When the symbol determination unit 109 determines that one of a plurality of winning combinations has been won, the payout control unit 110 determines that the number of stored credit medals is equal to the upper limit (this embodiment After the number of medals reaches 50 (in the embodiment, for example, 50), the hopper unit 43 is operated to pay out medals by the payout number corresponding to the winning combination. Until the number of stored credit medals reaches the upper limit, the payout control means 110 increases the number of credit medals by the above-described number of payouts instead of the operation of the hopper unit 43 as payouts of medals.

  By the way, when the symbol determination means 109 determines that the re-game combination has been won, the payout control means 110 determines that a predetermined number (three) of medals have been inserted, and activates the pay line of the next game. I do.

(11) Sub-control command transmission means 111
The sub-control command transmitting unit 111 of FIG. 7 transmits a command including various data created by the command creating unit 108 from the main control board 63 (main CPU 61) to the sub-control board 73 (sub CPU 71) as predetermined information. Send by road. The sub-control command transmission means 111 is created by the command creation means 108 and set by the setting control means 101, a game state such as a normal game state and a special game state, an AT non-permissible state and an AT permitted state, The slot machine 1 includes the role lottery result of the role lottery means 103, the symbol determination result by the symbol determination means 109, the rotation / stop state of each of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R, and the payout state of medals by the payout control means 110. Is transmitted to the sub-control board 73 (sub-CPU 71).

  The sub-control command transmitting unit 111 transmits a command created by the command creating unit 108 including data indicating the state of detection of the inserted medal by the insertion sensor 53, the operation state of the bet switch 15 and the maximum bet switch 17, and the like to the sub-control board. 73 (sub CPU 71). The sub-control command transmitting unit 111 is created by the command creating unit 108 including data indicating that various switches such as the start switch 19 and the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R have been operated by the player. Is transmitted to the sub control board 73 (sub CPU 71).

(12) Specific event detection means 112
The specific event detection means 112 in FIG. 7 is for detecting whether a specific event has occurred. Specifically, the specific event includes a state in which an abnormal state different from a normal state occurs in the slot machine 1, that is, a so-called error occurrence.

  Specifically, the specific event includes, for example, a game medal error, a payout game medal error, a payout failure error, a payout game medal expiration error, a RWM error, a reel error, an overflow error, a game medal payout device connection error, A sensor error or the like corresponds. For these specific events (errors), error codes (E0, E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, and EA) for classifying the respective types are set.

(13) Game stop means 113
The game stopping means 113 of FIG. 7 is for stopping the game (error processing) so that the game cannot be advanced based on the occurrence of the specific event (error) detected by the specific event detecting means 112.

(14) Flag storage means 651
The flag storage unit 651 in FIG. 7 is configured by an area preset in the RWM 65 and stores various flags.

(15) Number of games counter 652
The number-of-games counter (400 counter) 652 in FIG. 7 includes an area preset in the RWM 65, and stores the number of games (number of games). The initial game number, which is the initial value of the game number counter 652, is set to zero. After counting the number of games up to a preset number of games M (M = 400 in this embodiment), the number-of-games counter 652 is initialized again to 0, which is the initial value, and then up to the number of games M. It is configured to count the number of games. In the program, 0 to 399 are counted, and when the count reaches 399, the value returns to the initial value of 0 again.

(16) Game information storage means 653
The game information storage means 653 in FIG. 7 is configured by an area preset in the RWM 65,
The data shown in FIG. 11 (data common to the set values) is stored, where the predetermined number of games as the predetermined totaling standard is 400 games, and the number of set games M as the predetermined totalizing standard is 6000.

  As shown in FIG. 11, a 2-byte storage area (400 in FIG. 11) for storing the total payout number for 400 games in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 is stored in the game information storage unit 653. A 3-byte storage area (corresponding to the total payout number from P1 to P15) and a cumulative value of the total payout number for 400 games in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 (see FIG. 11). A 4-byte storage area (corresponding to the total number of payouts in FIG. 11) for storing the total number of total payouts after installation or after RWM clear is formed. ing.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11, the game information storage means 653 has a 2-byte storage area (FIG. 11) for storing the number of payouts for 400 games in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15. 11) (corresponding to the number of bonuses to be paid out from P1 to P15 in 11), and a 3-byte storage area for storing the cumulative value of the number of bonuses to be paid out for 400 games in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15. (Corresponding to the cumulative number of bonuses to be paid out in FIG. 11), a 4-byte storage area for storing the total cumulative number of bonuses to be paid after installation or after RWM clearing (total of bonuses in FIG. 11) (Corresponding to the number of payouts). Here, the number of paid-out articles is the sum of the number of paid-out sheets in BB and the number of paid-out sheets in CB. If there is an SB (single bonus), it is the sum of the number of payouts in BB, the number of payouts in CB, and the number of payouts in SB. However, the SB corresponds to an ordinary accessory, and the small combination probability increases only for one game, and is not carried over to the next game even in the case of a loss.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11, the game information storage means 653 has a 2-byte storage area (400 bytes) for storing the number of consecutive payouts for 400 games in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15. 3 bytes for storing the cumulative value of the number of consecutive bonus game payouts for 400 games in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. 11). Storage area (corresponding to the cumulative number of consecutive bonuses to be paid out of the cumulative PS in FIG. 11), and a 4-byte storage area for storing the total cumulative number of consecutive bonuses to be paid after the installation or after the RWM clear (see FIG. 11). (Corresponding to the total number of consecutive bonus articles paid out). Here, the number of consecutive payouts is the number of payouts in BB. Note that even if there is an SB, it is the number of payouts in BB.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11, a 4-byte storage area for storing the total number of games after installation or RWM clear in the game information storage means 653 (corresponding to the total number of games in FIG. 11). In addition, a 4-byte storage area (corresponding to the total number of advantageous section games in FIG. 11) for storing the number of advantageous section games after installation or after RWM clear is formed. The information related to the special game permissible state is totaled, and a predetermined calculation can be performed using the information.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the gaming information storage means 653 stores the bonus ratio (the percentage of the cumulative PS bonus payout number in FIG. 11 with respect to the total cumulative PS payout number in the latest 6000 game: the “principal ratio (6000) 1) storage area (corresponding to the ratio of the cumulative PS in FIG. 11), and the ratio of the bonuses in the cumulative game (the total cumulative number of bonuses to be paid in FIG. 11). Is stored as a 1-byte storage area (corresponding to the total cumulative bonus ratio in FIG. 11) for storing the percentage of the total cumulative total number of payouts: referred to as the "principal ratio (cumulative)". ing.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11, the gaming information storage means 653 stores, in the most recent 6000 game, the continuous bonus ratio (the percentage of the cumulative bonus PS payout number in FIG. 11 with respect to the total cumulative PS payout number: “continuous”. 1-byte storage area (corresponding to the continuous PS ratio of the cumulative PS in FIG. 11) for storing the "principal ratio (6000 games)." A 1-byte storage area for storing the percentage of the total cumulative number of consecutive bonuses to be paid out to the total number of total bonuses (to be referred to as “continuous bonuses ratio (total)”) (the total cumulative number of consecutive bonuses in FIG. 11). (Corresponding to the continuous character ratio).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11, the game information storage means 653 stores an advantageous section ratio in the cumulative game (percentage of the total cumulative advantageous section game number in FIG. 11 with respect to the total cumulative total game number: "advantage section ratio ( A 1-byte storage area (corresponding to the advantageous section ratio of the total total in FIG. 11) for storing the total number is stored.

  Further, the game information storage means 653 further stores data shown in FIG. 12 as data for each set value.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the game information storage means 653,
(I) A 4-byte storage area for storing the total number of payouts in setting 1 after installation or after RWM clear (corresponding to the total payout number (setting 1) in FIG. 12)
(Ii) A storage area of 4 bytes for storing the total cumulative number of consecutive bonuses to be paid in the setting 1 after the installation or after the RWM clear (corresponding to the number of consecutive bonuses to be paid (setting 1) in FIG. 12)
(Iii) A 4-byte storage area for storing the total sum of the number of the paid-out articles and the number of paid-out sheets by the AT combination in the setting 1 after the installation or after the RWM clear (the combination of the "actual goods + the number of paid AT combinations" in FIG. 12) (Corresponds to (Setting 1))
(Iv) 4-byte storage area for storing the total number of games in setting 1 after installation or after RWM clear (corresponding to the total number of games (setting 1) in FIG. 12)
(V) 4-byte storage area for storing the total cumulative number of advantageous section games in setting 1 after installation or RWM clear (corresponding to the number of advantageous section games (setting 1) in FIG. 12)
(Vi) The percentage of the total sum of the number of paid-out articles in the setting 1 after the installation or the RWM clear and the number of paid-out sheets by the AT combination to the total sum of the number of paid-out sheets in the setting 1 after the installation or after the RWM clear. 1-byte storage area for storage (corresponds to the (accessory + AT combination) ratio (setting 1) in FIG. 12)
(Vii) One byte for storing the percentage of the total number of consecutive bonus articles to be paid in the setting 1 after the installation or the RWM clear in the setting 1 after the installation or the RWM clear in the setting 1 after the RWM clear. Storage area (corresponding to the continuous character ratio (setting 1) in FIG. 12)
(Viii) A 1-byte storage area for storing the percentage of the total cumulative number of advantageous section games in the setting 1 with respect to the total cumulative number of games in the setting 1 (in the advantageous section ratio (setting 1 in FIG. 12) Correspondence) is formed. Also, in the game information storage means 653, storage areas of items similar to (i) to (viii) are formed for other set values (setting 2 to setting 6).

  Note that the size of each storage area is not limited to the above, and can be changed as appropriate.

  In the present embodiment, specific winning combination groups having different degrees of advantage to be given to the player according to the operation mode of the left / middle / right stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R (left bell, middle bell in FIG. 9). , Right bell). When the role lottery result of the role lottery means 103 becomes the specific winning role group winning result that has been won in the specific winning role group, the main CPU 61 determines the AT game (specifies an advantageous operation mode corresponding to the specific winning role group). Perform special games to notify as much as possible.

  In a game in an AT non-permitted state in which an AT game is not permitted, the game state setting means 100b determines whether to shift from the AT non-permitted state to the AT permitted state based on the result of the role lottery by the role lottery means 103. Specifically, when the gaming state setting means 100b wins the winning combination group "middle cherries" and "common bell 1," the payout display control means 118 determines the transition from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state. Control is performed to turn on the advantageous section lamp 47 corresponding to the notification lamp that indicates whether the state is the allowable state or the AT non-permissible state, and the AT allowable state (the section in the AT allowable state corresponds to the “advantageous section”). ) Is displayed.

  In the lighting control of the advantageous section lamp 47, the payout display control means 118 determines the shift from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state (in this embodiment, the winning combination group “middle cherry”, “common bell 1”). (The winning), a predetermined timing corresponding to each of the winning combination group “middle cherry” and “common bell 1” (in this embodiment, the winning combination group “middle cherry” and “common bell 1”) Are predetermined timings in steps S207 and S216 in the main process of FIG. 22.) In the advantageous section lamp lighting control data used for controlling the lighting and extinguishing of the advantageous section lamp 47 in the advantageous section lamp 47, The content indicating the lighting ("1" in this embodiment) is set, and the ramp process (step S43) in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 29 is set. Lighting the advantageous intervals lamp 47 based on the preferred segment lamp lighting control data in). Then, the payout display control means 118 determines the end condition of the AT allowable state (in this embodiment, winning in the drop lottery after the AT remaining game number counter 654 becomes 0, and the AT continuous game number counter 655 becomes 0). At a predetermined timing (in the present embodiment, the timing is step S220 in the main process of FIG. 22), the turning off of the advantageous section lamp 47 is included in the advantageous section lamp lighting control data. The contents shown ("0" in this embodiment) are set, and the advantageous section lamp 47 is turned off based on the advantageous section lamp lighting control data in the ramp processing (step S435) in the timer interrupt processing of FIG.

  At a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, the timing is step S221 in the main process of FIG. 22), the counting means 114a counts the game as a game in the AT allowable state (advantage section). If the next game is a game in the AT-permitted state, the advantageous section count flag indicating whether or not to perform the game is set to the content indicating the count ("1" in this embodiment), and the next game is set in the AT-permitted state. If the game is not a game, the content is set to a value indicating that counting is not performed ("0" in this embodiment). The details will be described in the later-described tallying unit 114a.

  The details of the setting and timing of the advantageous section lamp lighting control data and the setting and timing of the advantageous section count flag will be described in the description of the main processing in FIG.

  The period from the next game of the game in which the advantageous section lamp lighting control data used for controlling the lighting and extinguishing of the advantageous section lamp 47 to the lighting content to the game in which the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is set to the extinguishing content, that is, , AT allowable state is an advantageous section. In the game of the advantageous section, when the number of the advantageous section games is counted, the advantageous section count flag is set to the content indicating the count, and the number of the advantageous section games is set during the period in which the advantageous section count flag is set to the content indicating the count. Is the number of games (games) started. The tallying unit 114a counts the games (games) as the number of advantageous section games on condition that the advantageous section counting flag is set to indicate the count. As a result, it becomes possible to sum up information related to the AT allowable state and perform a predetermined calculation using the information.

  In the present embodiment, when the winning combination groups “Middle Cherry” and “Common Bell 1” are won, the AT period of, for example, 20 games is provided without exception, but the 0 game (losing) is given with a predetermined probability. ) May be provided. In this case, when the winning combination groups “Middle Cherry” and “Common Bell 1” are won, the state shifts to the AT allowable state, and the payout display control means 118 is advantageous until the predetermined AT allowable state end condition is satisfied. The lighting control of the section lamp 47 is performed. The end condition of the AT allowable state is that, for example, a 1/8 drop lottery is performed in each game excluding a so-called rare winning game such as a middle cherry in the AT allowable state. It is configured to shift to an allowable state. At this time, when the falling lottery is won, the payout display control means 118 controls the turning off of the lit advantageous section lamp 47. Until the falling lottery is won, for example, it is determined whether to set the AT period by the AT lottery of each game. When this AT lottery is won, the initial number of games in the AT period is determined, and, for example, the AT period starts from the next game. The AT lottery is, for example, a winning combination of one of the winning combinations 1 to 12. During the AT period, the drop lottery is not performed, and the game in which the AT period has ended transitions from the AT permitted state to the AT non-permitted state. At this time, the payout display control means 118 controls to turn off the lighted advantageous section lamp 47. In this case, the AT game may not be performed even in the AT allowable state, but even in such a case, the AT period is likely to occur during the AT allowable state. To reflect. Note that, even when the AT period given by the winning of the AT lottery ends, the AT allowable state may be maintained, and the state may shift to the AT non-permissible state when a similar falling lottery is won.

  However, regarding the total payout number, the bonus payout number, and the continuous bonus payout number shown in FIG. 11, the storage area for storing the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 has a ring buffer structure, and the first period P1, From the first term P1 to the fifteenth term P15 as in the second term P2, the third term P3, ..., the fourteenth term P14, the fifteenth term P15, the first term P1, the second term P2, ... Are sequentially updated every 400 games, and the value of the period corresponding to the updated ring pointer is cleared and then updated every game. In addition, the cumulative PS and the total sum are updated every 400 games with respect to the total number of payouts, the number of bonuses, and the number of consecutive bonuses. Further, the total number of games and the number of advantageous section games are updated for each game. The total number of games is information that is updated irrespective of the determination result of the symbol determining means (winning determining means) 109.

  The advantageous section ratio (total) common to the set values shown in FIG. 11 is calculated for each game. In addition, the bonus ratio (6000 games), the bonus ratio (total), the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), and the continuous bonus ratio (total) are calculated every 400 games. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the (combination + AT combination) ratio, the continuous combination ratio, and the advantageous section ratio for each set value shown in FIG. 12 are calculated for each game. Note that the ratios other than the set value set by the setting control means 101 do not change with respect to the (government + AT combination) ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the advantageous section ratio for each set value. May be calculated for each game by the ratio of.

  It should be noted that the total payout number described above (common to set values: see FIG. 11), the number of payables (common to set values: see FIG. 11), the number of consecutive bonus payouts (common to set values: see FIG. 11), the total number of games ( Common to set values: See FIG. 11), number of advantageous section games (common to set values: see FIG. 11), total payout amount by set value (by set value: see FIG. 12), continuous payout number of bonuses (by set value: FIG. 12), the number of bonuses and AT payouts (for each set value: see FIG. 12), the total number of games (for each set value: FIG. 12), and the number of advantageous zone games (for each set value: see FIG. 12) are tabulated items. Applicable. In addition, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative (set value common): refer to FIG. 11), continuous accessory ratio (6000 games (set value common: see FIG. 11)), bonus item ratio (6000 games (set value common): FIG. 11) Reference) ratio, continuous accessory ratio (cumulative (set value common): see FIG. 11), bonus item ratio (cumulative (set value common): see FIG. 11), (accessory + AT combination) ratio (by set value: FIG. 12) ), The continuous accessory ratio (for each set value: see FIG. 12) and the advantageous section ratio (for each set value: see FIG. 12) correspond to the calculation items.

  The total number of games common to the set values and the total number of games for each set value are information updated regardless of the determination result of the symbol determining means (winning determining means) 109, and the information is updated by the counting means 114a described later. .

  Further, the total number of payouts of the set value common PS and the total total, the set value common payout number, and the set value common continuous payout number are determined by the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (in this embodiment, This is information that is totaled (every 400 games). Predetermined conditions are set for the total number of payouts (common to set values), number of payables (common to set values), and number of consecutive payables (common to set values) for each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15. Even if it is not established (in this embodiment, each game), it is information that is totaled, and the total total number of games (common to set values) and the total cumulative number of advantageous section games (common to set values) are determined by predetermined conditions. (In this embodiment, each game) does not hold. In the present embodiment, the predetermined condition is satisfied every 400 games, but the present invention is not limited to this. Further, the total number of payouts, the number of consecutive bonus payouts, the number of bonus + AT payouts, the total number of games, and the number of advantageous section games for each set value are set even if the predetermined conditions are not satisfied (in this embodiment, each game). This is the information to be tabulated.

  The advantageous section ratio common to the set values (cumulative), the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), the bonus ratio (6000 games), the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), and the bonus ratio (cumulative) are calculated as described above. The item (see FIG. 11) is displayed in a predetermined order on the ratio display 69 in a normal state in which a switching flag described later is set to OFF. In the present embodiment, the predetermined order is as follows: the first is the advantageous section ratio (total), the second is the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), the third is the bonus ratio (6000 games), and the fourth is the continuous bonus. The fifth is the accessory ratio (cumulative).

  The continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), the bonus ratio (6000 games), the continuous bonus ratio (total), and the bonus ratio (total) common to the set values are obtained when a predetermined condition is satisfied (this embodiment). In this case, the calculation item is calculated every 400 games), and the advantageous section ratio (cumulative total) is a calculation item calculated even if a predetermined condition is not satisfied (in this embodiment, each game). Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (every 400 games in the present embodiment), the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), the bonus ratio (6000 games), and the continuous bonus ratio ( The cumulative total) and the accessory ratio (cumulative total) are in a specific order related to the predetermined order displayed on the ratio display 69 (in the present embodiment, the order opposite to the predetermined order displayed on the ratio display 69). Order). When the predetermined condition is not satisfied, only the first calculation item (in the present embodiment, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative total)) in the predetermined order displayed on the ratio display 69 is calculated. . In the present embodiment, the predetermined condition is satisfied every 400 games, but the present invention is not limited to this. Further, although the specific order is reverse to the predetermined order displayed on the ratio display 69, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific order is displayed on the ratio display 69. The order may be the same as the predetermined order. Furthermore, although the calculation item of the first order in the predetermined order is the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the present invention is not limited to this.

  The (accessory + AT combination) ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the advantageous section ratio for each set value are the calculation items (see FIG. 12) as described above. (The ratio display common to the set values) is switched and displayed. In the present embodiment, the first is an advantageous section ratio (setting 1), the second is a continuous character ratio (setting 1), the third is a (character + AT combination) ratio (setting 1)... The ratio (setting 6), the 17th item is displayed in the order of the continuous character ratio (setting 6), and the 18th item is displayed in the order of (character + AT combination) ratio (setting 6). Then, it is calculated after calculating the ratio common to the set values in each game. The calculation order at this time is calculated in the reverse order to the display order, as in the case of the ratio common to the set values. The order of calculating the ratio for each set value is reverse to the order displayed on the ratio display 69, but is not limited to this. For example, the order of the ratio displayed on the ratio display 69 is the same. It may be. Furthermore, in each of the setting values, the operation item in the first order is the advantageous section ratio, but the present invention is not limited to this.

(17) AT remaining game number counter 654
The AT remaining game number counter 654 in FIG. 7 is configured by an area preset in the RWM 65, and stores the remaining game number in the AT gaming state.

(18) AT continuous game number counter 655
The AT continuous game number counter 655 of FIG. 7 is configured by an area preset in the RWM 65, and stores the remainder of the maximum game number in one AT allowable state.

(19) Game history monitoring means 114
The game history monitoring means 114 of FIG. 7 monitors the game history, and functions as a counting means 114a and a calculating means 114b.

a) Tabulation means 114a
The counting means 114a in FIG. 7 is provided after the rotation of all the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is stopped and before the medal payout process is performed, regardless of the setting timing of the advantageous section lamp lighting control data. First, various data are totaled.

  The counting means 114a of FIG. 7 increments the storage value of the game number counter (400 counter) 652 by one for each game. The tallying unit 114a determines whether or not the stored value of the game number counter 652 is equal to the set game number M (= 400) which is the set tallying criterion. = 400), the stored value of the game number counter 652 is cleared to the initial value of 0. The initial value of the storage value of the game number counter 652 is set to the set game number M (= 400), and the storage value of the game number counter 652 is decremented by one for each game so that the number of games is counted. Is also good.

  In addition, the counting means 114a determines whether or not the rotation of all of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R has stopped, regardless of the setting timing of the advantageous section lamp lighting control data, and that the advantageous section lamp is turned on in the game. After all the setting timings of the control data have elapsed and before the bet number setting of medals for performing the next game can be performed, the advantageous section counting is performed after the game information totalizing process of totaling various data. Performs flag setting processing. In the process of setting the advantageous section count flag, the advantageous section count flag is set to the content indicating the count ("1" in the first embodiment) when the next game is a game in the AT allowable state, and the next game is executed. Is set to a content indicating that counting is not performed when the game is not a game in the AT allowable state (“0” in the first embodiment). In this embodiment, the processing of setting the advantageous section count flag is performed by setting the advantageous section lamp lighting control data set at the time of the processing as the advantageous section count flag. Note that one game starts from the start of the setting of the number of medals to the start of the setting of the number of medals for the next game. That is, one game is defined as the period from the start of the determination process in step S201 of the main process in FIG. 22 to the time immediately before the processes in steps S202 to S221 are performed and immediately before the determination process in step S201 is performed.

  The tallying unit 114a tallies up the storage contents of the game information storage unit 653 shown in FIGS. In the present specification, claims, drawings, etc., “totaling” means “together and sum up”, “to accumulate numbers”, and “together to sum up so far. Or adding a new value to the set value or the value accumulated so far. "

  Specifically, with respect to the items common to the set values shown in FIG. 11, the totaling means 114a calculates the total number of payouts and the number of bonuses for each game, the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15. By adding the winning number to the value of the number of consecutive bonuses and the number of consecutive bonuses, the values of the total number of bonuses, the number of bonuses, and the number of consecutive bonuses in the period are updated. In addition, the counting means 114a updates the value of the total game number of the total cumulative game for each game by incrementing the value by one, and updates the value of the total cumulative number of advantageous section games when the advantageous section count flag indicates the count. Update by incrementing by one.

  Further, the tallying unit 114a calculates the accumulation of the total number of payouts from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 every 400 games, stores the accumulated value in the total number of payouts of the cumulative PS, and starts from the first period P1. Calculate the accumulation of the number of bonus articles to be paid in the fifteenth term P15, store the accumulated value in the number of bonus articles to be paid in the cumulative PS, and calculate the accumulation of the number of consecutive bonus articles to be paid from the first term P1 to the fifteenth term P15. Then, the accumulated value is stored in the number of consecutive bonus articles to be paid out of the accumulated PS. In addition, the totaling means 114a adds the total payout amount in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 every 400 games to the total payout amount in the total total, thereby obtaining the total total payout amount. The total number of the paid-off articles is updated by adding the number of paid-out articles in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 to the total number of the paid-out items. Then, the total number of consecutive bonus articles to be paid is updated by adding the number of consecutive bonus articles to be paid in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 to the total number of consecutive bonus articles to be paid.

  The counting means 114a updates the ring pointer after updating the storage contents of the game information storage means 653 performed every 400 games after the number of games after the previous update of the ring pointer reaches 400, and then updates the ring pointer. The value of the total payout number, the number of bonus articles, and the number of consecutive bonus articles in the period corresponding to the updated ring pointer from P1 to the fifteenth period P15 are cleared to zero. Updating of the ring pointer is like the first period P1, the second period P2, the third period P3,..., The fourteenth period P14, the fifteenth period P15, the first period P1, the second period P2,. The first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 are sequentially repeated.

  On the other hand, regarding the item for each set value shown in FIG. By adding the winning number to the value as necessary, the values of the total payout number, the payout number, and the consecutive payout number of the set value of the set value are updated. The counting means 114a updates the value of the total number of games corresponding to the setting value set by the setting control means 101 by 1 for each game, and updates the value of the advantageous section count flag to indicate the count. The value of the number of advantageous section games corresponding to the set value set by the setting control means 101 is updated by incrementing the value by one.

  In each of the first term P1 to the fifteenth term P15 of the total payout number (common to the set value) in the game information storage unit 653, the total payout number for 400 games is stored. Since x400 = 3600 sheets, the data amount does not exceed the storage capacity of 2 bytes. In the present embodiment, the maximum payout number in one game is nine, but any number may be used as long as it is 15 or less. Even if the number is 15, the maximum payout number in the 400 games is 15 × 400 = 6000, and in this case, the storage capacity of 2 bytes does not exceed. The cumulative PS of the total payout number (common to the set value) is the sum of the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15, and stores the total payout number of the latest 6,000 games. The total payout number of the latest 6,000 games never exceeds the storage capacity of 3 bytes. On the other hand, the total sum of the total number of payouts (common to the set values) is accumulated with the end of the game and is not cleared, and thus may exceed the storage capacity of 4 bytes. Therefore, when the totaling means 114a totals the total number of payouts (common to the set value) and determines that the data amount of the total result exceeds the storage capacity of 4 bytes, the totaling number (set value) (Common) is configured not to update the total cumulative data. In addition, although the data of the total sum of the total number of payouts (common to the set value) has not been updated, the total sum of the number of payables (common to the set values) and the number of consecutive payables (common to the set values) Is updated, the calculation results of the accessory ratio (common to the set value) and the continuous accessory ratio (common to the set value) deviate from the actual results. Therefore, when the data of the total sum of the total number of payouts (common to the set value) is not updated, the totaling means 114a calculates the total sum of the number of payouts of the official article (common to the set value) and the number of consecutive payouts of the specialty ( It does not update the data of the total cumulative value (common to the setting values).

  Specifically, the tallying unit 114a updates the total data of the total number of payouts (common to the set value) every 400 games. At the time of the update, at the time of the update, a new tally result related to the update (stored before the update is stored). The data amount of the total of the total number of payouts and the total number of payouts in the period (P1 to P15) in which the total number of payouts of the 400 games (400 games immediately before update) are stored is 4 bytes. If it is determined that the storage capacity is exceeded, the subsequent data including the total payout number for the 400 games is not updated. The determination of whether or not the storage capacity is exceeded will be specifically described. For example, the data of the total number of payouts before the update of the current 400 games is FFFFFFFA in hexadecimal (6 more in decimal) In this case, when the total payout number during the 400 games is 6 or more (for example, 00FF in hexadecimal notation (255 in decimal notation)). ) Is determined to exceed the storage capacity. According to this configuration, when the counting unit 114a determines that the storage capacity exceeds 4 bytes, it is determined that the RWM address at which the data of the total cumulative number of payouts (common to the set value) is stored exceeds the storage capacity. The data stored at the update timing immediately before the update timing is maintained thereafter. If the totaling unit 114a determines that the data amount of the new totaling result related to the update of the total total number of payouts (common to the set value) exceeds the storage capacity of 4 bytes, the totaling unit 114a includes the immediately preceding 400 games including the immediately preceding 400 games. Neither is the data update of the total of the number of paid-offs (common to the set value) and the total of the number of consecutive paid-outs (common to the set value). Therefore, in the RWM address where the total cumulative data of the number of paid-offs (common to the set value) is stored and the RWM address where the total cumulative data of the continuous number of paid-offs (common to the set value) is stored, The data stored at the update timing immediately before the update timing determined to exceed the storage capacity of the address of the total number of payouts (common to the set value) will be maintained thereafter.

  It should be noted that the total amount of data of the number of paid-out articles (common to set values) and the total amount of data of the number of consecutive paid-out articles (common to set values) are the total of the total number of paid-out sheets (common to set values). If the total data amount of the total number of payouts (common to set values) exceeds the storage capacity of 4 bytes, in addition to the total data amount, the total total of the number of payable objects (common to set values) Is not updated, nor is the data update of the total cumulative number of consecutive bonus articles paid out (set value common), so that the data amount of both data does not exceed the storage capacity of 4 bytes.

  Also, the total sum of the total number of games (common to the set value) is accumulated with the end of the game and is not cleared, so that the storage capacity may exceed the 4-byte storage capacity. Therefore, when the totaling unit 114a totals the total number of games (common to the setting value) and determines that the data amount of the totaling result exceeds the storage capacity of 4 bytes, the totaling number (setting value (Common) is configured not to update the total cumulative data. Further, if the data of the total cumulative number of the advantageous section games (common to the set value) is updated even though the total cumulative data of the total number of games (common to the set value) is not updated, the advantageous section ratio The calculation result (common to setting values) deviates from the actual one. Therefore, the totaling means 114a does not update the data of the total number of advantageous section games (common to the set value) in a state where the total cumulative number of games (common to the set value) is not updated.

  Specifically, the tallying unit 114a updates the total cumulative data of the total number of games (common to the set value) for each game. At the time of the update, a new tally result related to the update (in the game before the game, Is determined to exceed the storage capacity of 4 bytes if the total amount of the total number of games (common to the set value) and the total number of games corresponding to the game concerned is greater than 4 bytes. Do not update data. Therefore, if the counting means 114a determines that the total capacity exceeds the 4-byte storage capacity, the RWM address at which the data of the total number of games (common to the set value) is stored is stored in the game immediately preceding the determination game. The data thus obtained will be maintained thereafter. If the totaling unit 114a determines that the data amount of the new totaling result related to the update of the total number of games (common to the set value) exceeds the storage capacity of 4 bytes, the totaling unit 114a includes the following advantageous effects including the game. The data of the total cumulative number of section games (set value common) is not updated. Therefore, even in the RWM address where the data of the total number of the advantageous section games (common to the set value) is stored, the data stored in the game immediately before the determination game is maintained thereafter.

  It should be noted that the total data amount of the number of advantageous section games (common to the set value) is not less than the total cumulative data amount of the total number of games (common to the set value), When the data amount of the total cumulative total exceeds the storage capacity of 4 bytes, the data of the total cumulative number of advantageous section games (common to the set value) is not updated, so that the total cumulative number of advantageous section games (common to the set value) is not updated. Does not exceed the storage capacity of 4 bytes.

  Also, the total sum of the total number of payouts (setting 1) is accumulated with the end of the game and is not cleared, and thus may exceed the storage capacity of 4 bytes. Therefore, when the totaling means 114a totals the total number of payouts (setting 1) and determines that the data amount of the totaling result exceeds the storage capacity of 4 bytes, the totaling number (setting 1) Is configured not to update the total cumulative data. In addition, despite the fact that the data of the total total number of payouts (setting 1) has not been updated, the total sum of the number of bonuses + AT number of payouts (setting 1) and the number of consecutive number of bonuses (setting 1) When the data of the total accumulation is updated, the calculation results of the (cassage + AT combination) ratio (setting 1) and the continuous combination ratio (setting 1) deviate from the actual results. Therefore, when the data of the total total number of payouts (setting 1) is not updated, the totaling means 114a calculates the total total of the number of bonuses + AT number of payouts (setting 1) and the number of consecutive bonuses (number 1). The data of the total accumulation of the setting 1) is not updated.

  Specifically, the tallying unit 114a updates the total data of the total number of payouts (setting 1) for each game, but at the time of the update, a new tally result related to the update (the game result of the previous game) If it is determined that the data amount of the total amount of the total payout number (setting 1) and the total number of payout numbers of the game) exceeds the storage capacity of 4 bytes, the subsequent update of the data including the game is performed. Not performed. Therefore, when the counting means 114a determines that the storage capacity exceeds 4 bytes, the RWM address in which the data of the total total number of payouts (setting 1) is stored is stored in the game immediately preceding the determination game. Data will be maintained thereafter. If the totaling unit 114a determines that the data amount of the new totaling result related to the update of the total cumulative number of payouts (setting 1) exceeds the storage capacity of 4 bytes, the counting unit 114a including the game in question The data of the total number of + AT combination payouts (setting 1) and the total total of consecutive combination payouts (setting 1) are not updated. Therefore, the determination game is also performed in the RWM address in which the data of the total cumulative number of the paid-off articles (setting 1) is stored and the RWM address in which the data of the cumulative total of the number of consecutive paid-out articles (setting 1) is stored. The data stored in the immediately preceding game is maintained thereafter.

  Note that the total data amount of the bonuses + AT number of payouts (setting 1) and the total amount of data of the consecutive number of bonuses (number 1) are the total of the total number of payouts (setting 1). If the total data amount of the total payout number (setting 1) exceeds the storage capacity of 4 bytes, in addition to the data amount of the total number of payouts (setting 1), Since the data update and the update of the total cumulative number of consecutive bonus articles (set 1) are not performed, the data amount of both data will not exceed the storage capacity of 4 bytes.

  The total sum of the total number of payouts (settings 2 to 6) of other set values, the total sum of the number of bonuses and AT number of payouts (settings 2 to 6), and the total sum of the number of consecutive bonuses (numbers 2 to 6) It is updated in the same way as setting 1.

  Further, the total number of the total games (setting 1) is also accumulated with the end of the game and is not cleared, so that the storage capacity may exceed the 4-byte storage capacity. Therefore, when the totaling means 114a totals the total number of games (setting 1) and determines that the data amount of the totaling result exceeds the storage capacity of 4 bytes, the total number of games (setting 1) Is configured not to update the total cumulative data. Also, if the data of the total cumulative number of advantageous section games (setting 1) is updated even though the data of the total cumulative number of total games (setting 1) is not updated, the advantageous section ratio (setting The calculation result of 1) deviates from the actual one. Therefore, the totaling means 114a does not update the data of the total number of advantageous section games (setting 1) in a state where the total cumulative number of games (setting 1) is not updated.

  Specifically, the tallying unit 114a updates the total data of the total number of games (setting 1) every game. At the time of the update, a new tally result related to the update (in the game before the game, If it is determined that the data amount of the total number of the total games (setting 1) and the total number of games corresponding to the game) exceeds the storage capacity of 4 bytes, the data of the subsequent data including the game is determined. Do not update. Therefore, when the counting means 114a determines that the storage capacity exceeds 4 bytes, the RWM address at which the data of the total number of total games (setting 1) is stored is stored in the game immediately preceding the determination game. Data will be maintained thereafter. In addition, when the totaling unit 114a determines that the data amount of the new totaling result related to the update of the total number of games (setting 1) exceeds the storage capacity of 4 bytes, the subsequent advantageous section including the game is included. The data of the total number of games (setting 1) is not updated. Accordingly, even at the RWM address where the data of the total number of the advantageous section games (setting 1) is stored, the data stored in the game immediately before the determination game is maintained thereafter.

  It should be noted that the data amount of the total cumulative number of advantageous section games (setting 1) is not more than the total cumulative data amount of the total number of games (setting 1). When the data amount exceeds the storage capacity of 4 bytes, the data of the total number of the advantageous section games (setting 1) is not updated, so that the total data amount of the number of advantageous section games (setting 1) becomes 4 It does not exceed the storage capacity of bytes.

  The total of the total number of games (settings 2 to 6) and the total of the number of advantageous section games (settings 2 to 6) of other setting values are also updated in the same manner as in setting 1. It should be noted that the total sum of the total number of payouts (common to the set value), the total sum of the number of consecutive bonus payouts (common to the set value), and the total total of the number of payable bonuses (common to the set value) are updated in 400 games. One game (every game), but updating of the total sum of the total number of payouts (common to the set value), the total sum of the number of consecutive bonus payouts (common to the set value), and the total total of the number of payable bonuses (common to the set value) May be set for each game, and other updates may be set for a plurality of games.

b) arithmetic means 114b
The calculating means 114b in FIG. 7 calculates an advantageous section ratio (cumulative) common to the set values for each game based on the stored contents shown in FIG. (6000 games), the continuous accessory ratio (total), and the accessory ratio (total) are calculated for every 400 games.

  In the calculation of the advantageous section ratio common to the set values (cumulative total), the ratio (percentage) (%) of the total cumulative number of advantageous section games (common to the set value) to the total cumulative number of games (common to the set value) is calculated. . In addition, in the calculation of the continuous bonus ratio for common set values (6000 games), the ratio (percentage) of the number of consecutive bonus payouts (common to set values) of the cumulative PS to the total number of common PS paid out (common to set values) ( %), And in the calculation of the common object ratio (6000 games) common to the set values, the ratio (percentage) of the number of the paid-out articles of the cumulative PS (common to the set values) to the total number of the common PS paid out (common to the set values) ) (%) Is calculated. Further, in calculating the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) common to the set values, the ratio (percentage) (%) of the total cumulative number of continuous bonuses (common to the set values) to the total cumulative number of payables (common to the set values) ) Is calculated, and in calculating the common property ratio (cumulative value) common to the set values, the ratio (percentage) (percentage) of the total cumulative number of property payouts (common to the set value) to the total cumulative number of payable articles (common to the set value) ( %).

  In addition, the calculation means 114b calculates the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the (character + AT combination) ratio for each game based on the stored contents shown in FIG. For example, in the calculation of the advantageous section ratio of setting 1, the ratio (percentage) (%) of the number of advantageous section games in setting 1 to the total number of games in setting 1 is calculated. In the calculation of the continuous bonus ratio in the setting 1, the ratio (percentage) (%) of the number of consecutive bonuses to be paid out in the setting 1 (total) to the total number of paid outs in the setting 1 is calculated. Further, in the calculation of the (cassette + AT combination) ratio of the setting 1, the ratio (percentage) (%) of the sum of the number of the paid-out articles of the setting 1 and the number of paid-outs by the AT combination to the total number of paid-out sheets in the setting 1 ) Is calculated. The calculating means 114b also calculates the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the (character + AT) ratio of the other set values (setting 2 to setting 6) in the same manner.

(20) Display control means 115
The display control unit 115 of FIG. 7 performs display control for performing display based on FIGS. 14 to 17 on the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69.

  First, the correspondence between a plurality of illuminable locations of a 7-segment display and 1-byte (8-bit) display data will be described with reference to FIG.

  The seven-segment display has eight lightable locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP, and eight lightable locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP. Correspond to the 0th bit, the 1st bit, the 2nd bit, the 3rd bit, the 4th bit, the 5th bit, the 6th bit, and the 7th bit of the display data of 1 byte (8 bits), respectively. When the value is 0, the light is turned off and when it is 1, the light is turned on. For bits, the least significant bit is described as the 0th bit, and for the bytes, the least significant byte is described as the first byte.

  For example, when the value of 1 byte is $ FF (hexadecimal notation), that is, when 11111111 (binary notation), all of the lightable locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP are Light. When the value of one byte is $ 40 (hexadecimal notation), that is, 01000000 (binary notation), the lightable portions A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP can be turned on. Only the point G is turned on.

  In the normal state in which the switching flag is set to OFF, the display control unit 115 determines a part of the light-enabled portions of all the light-enabled portions of the ratio display 69 (in the present embodiment, the thousands of positions of the ratio display 69). , A predetermined one of five types of game inspection information (a ratio common to set values) using other lightable portions except for the lightable portions DP (dot portion) at the tens place and the ones place. The game test information is displayed, and the display object of the ratio display 69 is sequentially changed to another game test information among the five types of game test information at regular intervals, whereby the five types of game test information are displayed on the ratio display. It is displayed periodically using the above 69 other lightable locations. During the display control of the five types of game inspection information using the other illuminable parts of the ratio display 69, the display control means 115 displays at least one of the five types of game inspection information. In the case of an abnormal state, a display for informing a predetermined abnormality is performed by using the above-mentioned part of the light-enabled portions of the ratio display 69. However, in the present embodiment, the game inspection information includes the inspection data (for example, the advantageous section ratio (total: common to the set value)) obtained by the calculation unit 114b and information for identifying the inspection data.

  In the state where the switching flag is set to ON, the display control unit 115 determines that some of the light-enabled portions of the ratio display 69 can be turned on (in the present embodiment, the number of light-emitting portions of the ratio display 69 is one thousand). A predetermined one of the 18 types of game inspection information (ratio by setting value) using other lightable places except for the lightable places DP (dot part) of each of the place, the tens place and the ones place Of the 18 types of game inspection information by sequentially changing the display target of the ratio display 69 to another one of the 18 types of game inspection information at predetermined intervals. It is periodically displayed by using the above-mentioned other lightable portions of the device 69. That is, when there is a change in the setting of the switching flag from OFF to ON, the display control unit 115 switches from displaying the ratio common to the set values to displaying the ratio for each set value. In the present embodiment, a display mode according to the display methods of FIGS. 14 to 17 is referred to as a “normal display mode”, and a display control of the normal display mode is referred to as a “normal display control”.

  Hereinafter, display contents in the normal display control by the display control unit 115 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 17.

  First, the display contents of the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69 related to the game inspection information (the ratio common to the set values) during the normal display control will be described with reference to FIG. However, the display content of the 7-segment display column in FIG. 14 is a specific display example of the ratio display 69, and the percentage (%) is 50 (%) and none of the five types of game inspection information is in an abnormal state. Is the case.

  On the ratio display 69, as display items of the game inspection information at the normal time, (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative: common to set value), (2) continuous character ratio (6000 games: common to set value), (3) 14) There are an accessory ratio (6000 games: common to set values), (4) a continuous accessory ratio (total: common to set values), and (5) an accessory ratio (total: common to set values), and these are shown in FIG. In accordance with the display method, the ratio display 69 is displayed using the other illuminable locations except for the illuminable locations DP (dot portion) at the thousands, tens and tens places. However, the ratio display numbers in FIG. 14 indicate the display order.

  Specifically, in (1) advantageous section ratio (cumulative: common to setting values), the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) segment of the ratio display 69 indicate “advantageous section ratio (cumulative: common to setting values). )) Is displayed, and the number of advantageous section games in the cumulative game after the installation in the lower two digits (tens and ones) segment of the ratio display 69 and after the RWM clear (see FIG. 11). A two-digit effective numerical value of a ratio (percentage) (%) of the total cumulative number of advantageous section games to the total number of games in the cumulative game (the total cumulative number of games in FIG. 11) is displayed.

  In the (2) continuous bonus ratio (6000 games: common to the set value), the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) segment of the ratio display 69 indicate “continuous bonus ratio (6000 games: set value). Abbreviated “6b” indicating “common”), and the last two digits (tens and ones) segment of the ratio indicator 69 in the last 6,000 games (continuation of the cumulative PS in FIG. 11). Two significant figures of the ratio (percentage) (%) of the number of paid-out articles to the total number of paid-out sheets (total paid-out number of cumulative PS in FIG. 11) in the latest 6000 game are displayed.

  Furthermore, in (3) the accessory ratio (6000 games: common to the set value), the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) of the segment of the ratio display 69 are displayed as “the accessory ratio (6000 games: common to the set value)”. Is displayed in the lower two digits (tens and ones) segment of the ratio indicator 69 in the most recent 6000 game (the number of bonus articles of the cumulative PS in FIG. 11). ) Is displayed as a two-digit effective numerical value of the ratio (percentage) (%) to the total payout number (total payout number of the cumulative PS in FIG. 11) in the latest 6000 game.

  Further, in the (4) continuous accessory ratio (total: common to the set value), the high-order two-digit (thousands and hundreds) segment of the ratio display 69 indicates “continuous accessory ratio (total: common to the set value)”. Is displayed in the lower two digits (tens and ones) segment of the ratio indicator 69, or the consecutive payout number in the cumulative game after the installation or the RWM clear (see FIG. 11). Two significant digits of the ratio (percentage) (%) of the total cumulative number of consecutive bonuses paid out to the total number of paid outs (the total number of paid out totals in FIG. 11) in the cumulative game after the installation or after the RWM clear are displayed. Is done.

  Furthermore, in (5) Combination ratio (cumulative: common to set values), “Communicator ratio (cumulative: common to set values)” is assigned to the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) of the ratio display 69. The abbreviation “7c” is displayed in the lower two digits (tens and ones) segment of the ratio display 69, and the number of payouts in the cumulative game after the installation or after the RWM clear (the total cumulative number in FIG. 11). A two-digit effective numerical value of a ratio (percentage) (%) of the number of paid-out articles to the total number of paid-out sheets (the total number of paid-out sheets in FIG. 11) in the cumulative game after the installation or after the RWM clear is displayed.

  However, when the percentage is 100 (%), it cannot be displayed in the lower two digits (tens and ones) segment of the ratio display 69, and therefore, in this embodiment, the lower order of the ratio display 69 is used. 99 (%) is displayed in a two-digit (tens and ones) segment.

  Also, (1) advantageous section ratio (total: common to set values), (2) continuous bonus ratio (6000 games: common to set values), (3) bonus ratio (6000 games: common to set values), (4) As shown in the 7-segment display column of FIG. 14, in the continuous accessory ratio (total: common to the set value) and (5) the accessory ratio (total: common to the set value), the hundredth-place illuminable portion DP is lit. It has become. By illuminating the hundreds of possible lighting positions DP, it is easy to grasp the boundary between the identification segment and the ratio segment when the game inspection information is not in an abnormal state.

  (1) Advantageous section ratio (total: common to set value), (2) Continuous bonus ratio (6000 games: common to set value), (3) Local bonus ratio (6000 games: common to set value), (4) The continuous accessory ratio (total: common to the set value) and (5) the accessory ratio (total: common to the set value) are displayed in a predetermined order. Specifically, (1) the advantageous section ratio (total: common to the set value) is displayed for a certain period. Subsequently, (2) a continuous character ratio (6000 games: common to set values) is displayed for a certain period of time, and subsequently (3) a special character ratio (6000 games: common to set values) is displayed for a certain period of time. Subsequently, (4) the continuous accessory ratio (total: common to the set value) is displayed for a certain period of time, and further (5) the accessory ratio (total: common to the set value) is displayed for a certain period of time.

  Then, the game inspection information of these display items (1) to (5) is sequentially and repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. At this time, for example, when the game has not reached 6000 games (2) and (3), the upper two digits of the segment are blinked. For example, when the game has not reached the 175,000 game, the segments of the upper two digits are blinked in (1), (4), and (5). Further, in (1) to (5), the advantageous section ratio (total: common to the set value), the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games: common to the set value), the bonus ratio (6000 games: common to the set value), the continuous bonus ratio If the total (common: set value common) and the accessory ratio (total: common set value) are respectively equal to or greater than a predetermined value (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “specific ratio value”), the lower 2 ranks are set. Digit segments flash.

  However, when the power is turned off and the power is turned on again, the display is performed from the (1) advantageous section ratio (total: common to the set value) regardless of the display item when the power is turned off. For example, if the power is turned off while the power is turned off while the (3) character ratio (6000 games: common setting value) is displayed, (1) the advantageous section ratio (total: common setting value) is changed. Is displayed.

  Note that the abbreviations are merely examples, and are not limited to those shown in FIG. 14, as long as the display items are different from each other.

  Subsequently, the display contents of the advantageous section ratio (cumulative: common to the set value) of the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69 relating to the game inspection information during the normal display control in a model having no advantageous section will be described with reference to FIG. I do. Here, the display content of the 7-segment display column in FIG. 15 is a specific display example of the advantageous section ratio (total: common to the set value) in the model without the advantageous section, and five types of game inspection information (set value Common ratio) is not an abnormal state.

  As shown in the 7-segment display column of FIG. 15, using the other illuminable locations except for the illuminable locations DP (dotted portions) at the thousands, tens and ones places of the ratio display 69. , The abbreviation “7A” indicating “advantageous section ratio (total: common to set values)” is displayed in the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) segments of the ratio display 69, and the lower two digits of the ratio display 69. “−−” (only the lit location G is lit) is displayed in the digit (tens and ones) segment. However, as in the case of (1) the advantageous section ratio (total: common to the set value) in FIG. 14, also in the case of (1) the advantageous section ratio (total: common to the set value) in FIG. The location DP is turned on.

  Next, first, with reference to FIG. 16, the display contents of the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69 related to the game inspection information (the ratio for each set value) under the normal display control will be described. Here, the display content of the 7-segment display column in FIG. 16 is a specific display example of the ratio display 69, in which the percentage (%) is 50 (%) and any of the 18 types of game inspection information is in an abnormal state. Is not the case.

  On the ratio display 69, (6) the advantageous section ratio in the setting 1, the (7) the continuous character ratio in the setting 1, and (8) ) (Character + AT combination) ratio in setting 1 ... (21) Advantageous section ratio in setting 6, (22) Continuous character ratio in setting 6, (23) (Character + AT combination) ratio in setting 6 These are other lit possible parts except for the lit places DP (dot part) of the thousands, tens and ones places of the ratio display 69 in accordance with the display method shown in FIG. It is displayed using the location. Here, the ratio display numbers in FIG. 16 indicate the display order.

  More specifically, of the four segments, the thousands place is a reference value (“ratio”) that is set in advance to determine whether the value of the ratio of the display item is normal or abnormal. It is set as the place where the tens digit is displayed in the “specified value”). That is, when the reference value of the display item is 70%, the number “7” is displayed in the thousands segment. Next, the hundreds place is set as a part for specifying the content of the display item and the setting value of the item. Specifically, of the hundreds of segments, three lighting locations A, B, and F indicate the contents of the display items, and the remaining four lighting locations C, D, E, and G indicate the setting values of the display items. Is shown. In this embodiment, if only the lighting spot F of the hundredth segment is turned on, the content of the display item is “advantageous section ratio”, and if only the lighting spot A is turned on, the content of the display item is Is set to be the “(continued character ratio) ratio” when only the lighting location B is lit.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 16 (b), when only the lighting spot E is turned on among the lighting spots C, D, E and G of the hundredth segment, the display item of the setting 1 is set. When only the lighting location G is lit, it indicates that the display item is of the setting 2. When only the lighting location C is lit, the display item is the setting 3. If only the lighting location D is lit, this indicates that the display item is for setting 4. If only two of the lighting locations E and C are lit, Indicates that the display item is of setting 5, and if only two of the lighting locations D and G are lit, the setting is made to indicate that the display item is of setting 6. I have.

  In the lower two-digit segment, as in the case of the display of the ratio common to the set values, two significant figures of the ratio (percentage (%)) of the display item calculated by the calculating means 114b are displayed.

  However, when the percentage is 100 (%), it cannot be displayed in the lower two digits (tens and ones) segment of the ratio display 69, and therefore, in this embodiment, the lower order of the ratio display 69 is used. 99 (%) is displayed in a two-digit (tens and ones) segment.

  Also, (6) advantageous section ratio (setting 1), (7) continuous accessory ratio (setting 1), (8) (accessory + AT combination) ratio (setting 1) ... (21) advantageous section ratio (setting 6) In the (22) continuous character ratio (setting 6) and (23) (character + AT combination) ratio (setting 6), as shown in the 7-segment display column of FIG. It is lit. By illuminating the hundreds of possible lighting positions DP, it is easy to grasp the boundary between the identification segment and the ratio segment when the game inspection information is not in an abnormal state.

  These (6) advantageous section ratio (setting 1), (7) continuous character ratio (setting 1), (8) (government + AT combination) ratio (setting 1) ... (21) advantageous section ratio (setting 6) , (22) the ratio of consecutive bonuses (setting 6), and (23) the ratio of (casings + AT combination) (setting 6) are displayed in a predetermined order. Specifically, (6) the advantageous section ratio (setting 1) is displayed for a certain period. Subsequently, (7) the continuous character ratio (setting 1) is displayed for a certain period, and further (8) (character + AT combination) ratio (setting 1) is displayed for a certain period. Subsequently, (9) advantageous section ratio (setting 2)... (23) (combination + AT combination) ratio (setting 6) is displayed.

  Then, the game inspection information of these display items (6) to (23) is sequentially and repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. At this time, for example, for the display item of the continuous character ratio and the (character + AT combination) ratio of each set value, when the total number of games of the set value has not reached 17500 games, the upper two-digit segment is blinked. You. For example, for the display item of the advantageous section ratio of each set value, when the total number of games of the set value does not reach 175000 games, the upper two digits of the segment are blinked. Further, in (6) to (23), when the ratio is equal to or more than a predetermined ratio defined value corresponding to each display item, the lower two digits of the segment are blinked.

  However, when the power is turned off and the power is turned on again, the switching flag is reset to OFF, thereby switching to the display of the ratio common to the set values. Specifically, irrespective of the display item when the power is turned off, (1) the display is performed from the advantageous section ratio (total: common to the set value). For example, when the power is turned off while the power is turned off during the display of (7) the continuous accessory ratio (setting 1), (1) the advantageous section ratio (total: common to the set value) is displayed. .

  Note that the abbreviations are merely examples, and are not limited to those shown in FIG. 16.

  Finally, the display contents of the ratio display 69 related to the display for the predetermined abnormality notification during the normal display control of the display items common to the set values will be described with reference to FIG. However, the display contents in the 7-segment display column in FIG. 17B are specific display examples of the ratio display 69.

  As the abnormal states of the five types of game inspection information, the ratios calculated by the calculating unit 114b (in the present embodiment, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), the bonus ratio (6000 games), the continuous If the value of the ratio of the bonus (cumulative) and the ratio of the bonus (cumulative) is equal to or greater than the specified ratio, the total number of games since the installation used for calculating the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) or since the RWM clear (the total number of games in FIG. 11) (The value stored in the storage area corresponding to the total number of games) may be less than 175,000.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, when at least one of the ratio display numbers 3 (continuous accessory ratio (total)) and 4 (accessory ratio (total)) is equal to or greater than the specified ratio, the ratio is displayed. The first possible lighting position DP (dot portion) of the container 69 blinks. In addition, the ratio display numbers 0 (advantageous section ratio (cumulative)), 1 (continuous bonus ratio (6000 games)), 2 (local bonus ratio (6000 games)), 3 (continuous bonus ratio (cumulative)), 4 When at least one ratio of the (combination of character portions) is equal to or more than the specified ratio value, the tens place lit place DP (dot portion) of the ratio display 69 blinks. Further, when the total number of games after the installation or after the RWM clear is less than 175000, the thousands possible lighting portion DP (dot portion) of the ratio display 69 blinks.

  As shown in FIG. 17 (b), when at least one ratio of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 is equal to or more than the specified ratio value and the total number of games is 175000 or more, the above-mentioned partial lighting of the ratio display 69 is performed. The game inspection information is displayed using other lightable locations except for the possible locations, and the first and tenth possible light locations DP ( The dot portion) blinks, and the thousands of lightable portions DP (dot portion) out of the above-mentioned partially lit portions of the ratio display 69 are turned off. In this case, the ratio display numbers 0 to 2 may or may not have a ratio display number equal to or greater than a specified ratio value.

  In addition, when at least one ratio of the ratio display numbers 0 to 2 is equal to or more than the specified ratio value, all the ratios of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 are less than the specified ratio value, and the total number of games is 175000 or more, the ratio display is performed. The game inspection information is displayed by using other lightable places except for the above part of the lightable parts of the display 69, and the tens place of the above partly lightable parts of the ratio display 69 is displayed. The possible portion DP (dot portion) blinks, and the first and thousandth possible lightable portions DP (dot portion) of the above-mentioned partial lightable portions of the ratio display 69 are turned off.

  In addition, when all the ratios of the ratio display numbers 0 to 4 are less than the ratio stipulated value and the total number of games is less than 175,000, other lightable portions of the ratio display 69 except for the above-mentioned part of the lightable portions are set. The game inspection information is displayed by using the above-mentioned information, and the one-thousandth possible light-emitting portion DP (dot portion) of the above-mentioned part of the lightable portions of the ratio display 69 blinks. The first and tenth ignitable portions DP (dot portions) of the illuminable portions of the section are turned off.

  When at least one ratio of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 is equal to or more than a specified ratio value and the total number of games is less than 175,000, other lightable portions of the ratio display 69 except for the above-mentioned part of the lightable portions. And display the game inspection information by using, and the lit places DP (dot portion) of the first place, the tens place, and the thousands place of the above part of the lit places of the ratio display 69 blink. I do. In this case, the ratio display numbers 0 to 2 may or may not have a ratio display number equal to or greater than a specified ratio value.

  In addition, when at least one ratio of the ratio display numbers 0 to 2 is equal to or more than the specified ratio value, all the ratios of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 are less than the specified ratio value, and the total number of games is less than 175000, the ratio display is performed. The game inspection information is displayed by using other lightable places except for the above part of the lightable places of the display 69, and the tens and one thousand of the above partly lightable places of the ratio display 69 are displayed. The light-enabled portions DP (dot portions) of the respective positions blink, and the light-enabled portions DP (dot portions) of the first place among the above-mentioned partial light-enabled portions of the ratio display 69 are turned off.

  In addition, when all the ratios of the ratio display numbers 0 to 4 are less than the ratio stipulated value and the total number of games is 175,000 or more, other lightable portions of the ratio display 69 except for the above-mentioned part of the lightable portions are set. In addition to displaying the game inspection information, the lit places DP (dot portion) at the first place, the tens place, and the thousands place of the above part of the lit places of the ratio display 69 are turned off. .

  In addition, in the present embodiment, considering that the display of the ratio indicator 69 has a portion where the blinking control is performed in accordance with the abnormal state, the specific example of FIG. It will be the illustration inside. Similarly, when an abnormality has occurred in the ratio for each set value, the content of the abnormality is determined by the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the lightable portions DP (dot portion) at the first place, tens place, and thousands place. Is preferably configured to be able to determine.

(21) Credit display control means 116
The credit display control means 116 in FIG. 7 performs display control for displaying the number of stored medals on the credit display 45.

(22) Cancel control means 117
For example, when the number of stored medals reaches the maximum stored number or during a game, the cancel control unit 117 in FIG. 7 does not drive the cancel coil using the electromagnet, so that the rail portion of the medal selector 48 does not operate. The medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 25 are discharged to the medal payout port 39 regardless of whether they are regular or irregular. In cases other than the above, the cancel coil using the electromagnet is driven to operate the rail portion of the medal selector 48, whereby it is determined whether or not the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 25 is a regular one. Only regular medals are guided to the hopper unit 43.

(23) Payout display control means 118
The payout display control means 118 of FIG. 7 can specify (1) the payout number display control for displaying the payout number via the payout control means 110 and (2) the type of the specific event (error) on the payout display 46. And error code display control for displaying special information (error code), which is important information. In addition, the payout display control means 118 displays that the area is an advantageous section by lighting the tens place or the ones place or both dots (corresponding to the lightable portion DP) of the payout display 46, and displays the tens place. Display control is performed to display that it is not an advantageous section by turning off the dot and the first place dot.

  However, the payout display control means 118 determines the transition from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state (in this embodiment, the winning combination group “Middle Cherry” and “Common Bell 1”), and Predetermined timing corresponding to each of the groups "middle cherry" and "common bell 1" (In this embodiment, each predetermined timing of the winning combination group "middle cherry" and "common bell 1" is In steps S207 and S216 in the main process of FIG. 22, the advantageous section lamp lighting control data used for controlling the lighting and extinguishing of the advantageous section lamp 47 indicates the lighting of the advantageous section lamp 47 (in this embodiment, "1") is set, and in the ramp processing (step S435) in the timer interruption processing of FIG. Lighting the advantageous intervals lamp 47 based on the data. Then, the payout display control means 118 determines the end condition of the AT allowable state (in this embodiment, winning in the drop lottery after the AT remaining game number counter 654 becomes 0, and the AT continuous game number counter 655 becomes 0). At a predetermined timing (in the present embodiment, the timing is step S220 in the main process of FIG. 22), the turning off of the advantageous section lamp 47 is included in the advantageous section lamp lighting control data. The contents shown ("0" in this embodiment) are set, and the advantageous section lamp 47 is turned off based on the advantageous section lamp lighting control data in the ramp processing (step S435) in the timer interrupt processing of FIG.

  Here, the game stop means 113 does not stop the game (error processing) until a stop operation is performed on the last reel (the last reel among the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R). At a predetermined timing after the stop operation on the last reel is performed (specifically, after a slip occurs after the stop operation on the last reel, and after the four-phase excitation by the stepping motor), the game is stopped (error processing). I do. At the same time, the payout display control means 118 performs display control for displaying special information (error code) on the payout display 46.

  In other words, the game stop means 113 does not stop the game (error processing) until a stop operation is performed on the last reel (last reel) of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R. Then, the game stop means 113 performs the game stop (error processing) at a predetermined timing after the stop operation on the last reel is performed, and the payout display control means 118 displays special information (error code) on the payout display 46. Is displayed.

  Further, when the reset switch (not shown, but the setting change button 50c of the operation box 50 also serves as the reset switch) is operated in the state where the error has occurred, the game stop means 113 A release condition for releasing the game stop (error processing) is satisfied. In this case, the game stop means 113 cancels the game stop by the game stop means 113, and makes the progress of the game possible. Further, the payout display control means 118 stops displaying the special information (error code display) performed on the payout display 46. However, in the case of an RWM error (E4 error), the RWM error (E4 error) is canceled by changing the setting.

(Sub control board)
Next, the configuration of the sub-control board 73 will be described in detail. The sub-control board 73 receives the command transmitted from the main control board 63 and performs an effect according to the operation and the state of the main control board 63. As shown in FIG. 7, the sub-control board 73 includes various functions realized by executing a program stored in the memory 75 and various functions realized by controlling hardware. I have.

(1) Sub-control command receiving means 201
The sub-control command receiving means 201 of FIG. 7 receives, as predetermined information, a command including various data transmitted by the sub-control command transmitting means 111 of the main control board 63 (main CPU 61). The sub-control command receiving unit 201 receives a command transmitted from the main control board 63 and, when receiving the command, notifies each function of the sub-control board 73 according to the type of the command.

(2) Production content determination means 202
The effect content determining means 202 of FIG. 7 is for determining the content of the effect according to the command received by the sub-control command receiving means 201. Specifically, a moving image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 is determined from an effect pattern set in advance in accordance with the progress of the game, the result of the lottery of the role lottery means 103, or the like, or from the speakers 31L and 31R. An effect such as deciding the music or voice to be played or blinking the light sources of the upper lamp section 33 and the lower lamp sections 37L and 37R simultaneously or individually is determined.

  If the received command corresponds to the received command during the AT period and the type of the winning combination group (bell group) that has been won can be identified, the effect content determination means 202 determines the player corresponding to the type of the winning combination group. The effect content is determined so that the user can understand the operation mode that is advantageous to the player, and if the received command does not correspond to the AT period, the player does not know the operation mode that is advantageous to the player. For example, when the command of “No. 1” shown in FIG. 9 is received according to the result of the lottery, it is understood that the player has won one of the winning combination groups of “Bell Group” because it is not during the AT period. Select one of the effects from the group of effects that you do not know if you won the left bell, middle bell, or right bell. When the "No. 2" command shown in FIG. 9 is received, one of the effects that indicate that the left bell has been won or the effect that prompts the user to operate the left stop switch 21L first. Select When the “No. 3” and “No. 4” commands shown in FIG. 9 are received, the effect contents are determined in the same manner.

  Also, when the effect content determination means 202 receives the commands of “No. 5” to “No. 8” shown in FIG. Select the production of Further, when the command of “No. 0” is received, similarly, one effect is selected from the effect group corresponding to the loss so as not to impair the player's expectation.

  If the received command is an AT non-permissible state and a command indicating “No. 5” (winning role group “Middle Cherry”), the effect content determining means 202 performs an AT allowable transition determining effect on the first stop of the stop switch. It is determined that the operation is to be performed at a timing after the operation, and after the determination, a command indicating a stop operation of any of the stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R is firstly received and the effect display control means 203 performs an AT allowable shift determination effect. And the effect display control means 203 performs an AT allowable shift determination effect at the timing after the first stop operation. If the received command is an AT non-permissible state and a command indicating “No. 9” (winning role group “Common Bell 1”), the effect content determination means 202 performs the AT allowable transition determination effect on all reels 13L and 13M. , 13R, and instructs the effect display control means 203 to perform the AT allowable transition determination effect at the timing when all the commands indicating the stop of the reels 13L, 13M, 13R are received after the determination. Then, the effect display control means 203 performs an AT allowable shift determination effect at a timing after all the reels 13L, 13M, 13R are stopped. Note that it is not always necessary to carry out the AT allowable transition determination effect. For example, a pattern in which the advantageous section lamp 47 is turned on after stopping all reels is compared with another pattern in which the advantageous section lamp 47 is turned on. The effect may be configured such that the effect is performed at a low rate or is performed in another pattern, but is not performed in the pattern.

  As the effect contents, for example, the operation order of the left, middle, and right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 by the effect content determining means 202, and the left, middle, and right stops are provided by the speakers 31L, 31R. The operation order of the stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R is notified by voice, and the lamps provided on the respective stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are blinked in a predetermined order, so that the operation order of the stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R is operated. Or blinks the backlight provided on each of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R in a predetermined order to notify the operation sequence of the left, middle, and right stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R. There are production contents such as.

  Then, the effect content determining means 202 transmits a signal including data on the determined effect content to the effect display control means 203 and the sound control means 204 described below.

(3) Effect display control means 203
The effect display control means 203 of FIG. 7 displays a moving image on the liquid crystal display 27, the upper lamp part 33, the lower lamp parts 37L, 37R, etc., based on the data included in the signal transmitted from the effect contents determining means 202. Effects such as blinking the light sources simultaneously or individually.

(4) Voice control means 204
The sound control means 204 in FIG. 7 executes effects such as playing music from the speakers 31L and 31R and outputting sound based on the data included in the signal transmitted from the effect content determining means 202.

(motion)
Subsequently, an operation of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, when the player is elected to the “bell group” (any of “left bell”, “middle bell”, and “right bell”) during the AT period (the AT period flag is ON), the winning is achieved. An effect of notifying the operation order of each of the stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the winning combination group that has become advantageous to the player is executed on the sub-control board 73, and each of the stop switches 21L, 21M, which is advantageous to the player. The operation order of 21R is notified.

  In the following description, various functions and means described above, and other functions realized by the main CPU 61 of the main control board 63 and the sub CPU 71 of the sub control board 73 executing various programs (detailed description is omitted) This is the process executed by Also, the processing of setting various flags to ON (ON) or OFF (OFF) and setting values to the various flags, which are executed in the following processing, are well-known techniques. Detailed description is omitted.

1. Processing at Power-on The processing at power-on will be described with reference to FIG. However, the power-on process is a process executed by the main CPU 61.

  The power-on process shown in FIG. 18 is a process executed when the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on. When the power switch 50a of the slot machine 1 is turned on, whether or not the power-off signal is on is determined. Is determined (Step S1), if the power interruption signal is determined to be ON (YES in Step S1), the process waits as it is, and if it is determined that the power interruption signal is OFF (NO in Step S1). ), A state in which access to the RWM 65 is enabled (step S2). Then, an RWM backup failure determination process, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 19, is performed (step S3). Subsequently, a power-on initialization process described in detail later with reference to FIG. 20 is performed (step S4).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the door sensor 58 is in the ON state (the front door 5 is in the closed state) (step S5). When it is determined that the door sensor 58 is ON (the front door 5 is closed) (YES in step S5), the process proceeds to step S8.

  If the door sensor 58 is not in the ON state (the front door 5 is in the closed state) in the determination processing in step S5, that is, if it is determined that the front door 5 is in the open state (NO in step S5), the setting change key switch 50b is operated. It is then determined whether or not it is in the ON state (step S6). If it is determined that the setting change key switch 50b is not in the ON state (NO in step S6), the process proceeds to step S8. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting change key switch 50b is in the ON state (YES in step S6), a setting change process described later in detail with reference to FIG. 21 is performed (step S7). As described above, in order to increase safety as a countermeasure against fraud, the slot machine 1 does not shift to the setting change process of step S7 unless the front door 5 is open and the setting change key switch 50b is not in the ON state. It has become.

  In step S8, it is determined whether the result of the RWM backup failure determination processing in step S3 is defective. This determination processing is to determine an RWM backup failure when an RWM backup failure is set in step S37 of FIG. 19 described later.

  When it is determined that the backup state of the RWM is defective (YES in step S8), error processing (specifically, an E4 error) is performed (step S9). Then, the power-on processing ends. The error process is a series of processes starting from saving the game state at the time of occurrence of the error and returning to the game-enabled state from the error. Note that, unlike other errors, the E4 error is an error that cannot be canceled without shifting to the setting change state. On the other hand, other errors can be canceled by operating the setting change button 50c (reset switch).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the RWM backup state is not defective (NO in step S8), it is determined whether any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (step S8). S10). If it is determined that none of the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (NO in step S10), the process proceeds to step S12. On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (YES in step S10), the restart state of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is set. Is performed (step S11), and the process proceeds to step S12. More specifically, a process of returning the rotating reel among the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R to the state before the power interruption is performed. When the power is turned on, settings are made so that the current states of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R can be restored.

  In step S12, a sensor error determination process (EA error) is performed. Then, the power-on processing ends. The sensor error determination process is a process of setting a predetermined error flag after determining whether the selector sensor A or B is ON.

1.1. RWM Backup Failure Determination Process The RWM backup failure determination process (step S3) in FIG. 18 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The specific event detecting means 112 determines the checksum value (step S31). This is to judge whether or not the checksum value held at the time of power failure matches the checksum value. If they do not match, it is determined that the backup is defective. The checksum value is obtained by regarding the data stored in the predetermined area of the RWM value as a sequence of integer values, obtaining the sum, and using the remainder obtained by dividing the sum by a predetermined constant as inspection data.

  The specific event detection means 112 determines the power interruption flag (step S32). This is a memory in which a predetermined numerical value predetermined at the time of power failure is stored, and if it is other than the predetermined numerical value, it is determined that the power failure is in an abnormal state.

  The specific event detecting means 112 determines a stack pointer (step S33). This is to determine the range of the stack pointer at the time of power failure, and holds the address of the most recently referenced position. If this address is outside the range of the predetermined address, an abnormal state is detected. Is determined.

  The specific event detecting means 112 determines the set value (step S34). Specifically, it is determined whether the set value is in the range of 1 to 6. If it is out of the range, it is determined as an abnormal state.

  The specific event detecting means 112 determines the higher rank of the internal winning information (step S35). This is to determine whether or not the bonus information of the winning information (lottery information) in the winning lottery is within a predetermined range of higher-level data. If the bonus information of the winning information (lottery information) of the role lottery is out of the range of the predetermined higher-level data, it is determined as an abnormal state.

  The specific event detection unit 112 determines whether the backup of the RWM is defective (step S36). Based on the determination results of steps S31 to S35, it is determined whether the state is abnormal, that is, whether the state is defective. When it is determined that the state is not defective (NO in step S36), the process returns to the power-on process shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the state is defective (YES in step S36), the specific event detection unit 112 sets an RWM backup failure (step S37). Then, the specific event detecting means 112 clears all the contents of the RWM 65 related to the ratio display (composition ratio monitor) 69 (step S38). Here, the contents to be cleared are, for example, the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. 11, the cumulative PS, and the total payout number, the number of bonuses, and the number of consecutive bonuses, respectively. Further, the total number of games and the number of advantageous section games are provided. In addition, the total payout number (setting 1 to setting 6), the continuous payout number (setting 1 to setting 6), the bonus item + AT payout number (setting 1 to setting 6), the total number of games (setting 1 to setting 6) in FIG. Setting 6), number of advantageous section games (setting 1 to setting 6), (accessory + AT combination) ratio (setting 1 to setting 6), continuous bonus item ratio (setting 1 to setting 6), advantageous section ratio (setting 1 to setting 1) Setting 6). Also, the cumulative PS and the cumulative total in FIG. 11 are the respective accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. Also, it is the total cumulative advantageous section ratio of FIG. Further, it is the setting content of the display data of the thousands display, the hundreds display, the tens display, and the ones display of the ratio display device (role ratio monitor) 69. Further, a 6000 arrival flag, a total game number upper limit flag, and a total payout upper limit flag described later. Then, the process returns to the power-on process shown in FIG.

1.2. Power-On Initial Setting Process The power-on initial setting process (step S4) of FIG. 18 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The display control means 115 clears the ratio display number and sets the value to 0 (step S51). As a result, when the power is turned on, (1) the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), which is a display item corresponding to the ratio display number 0, is displayed on the ratio display (combination ratio monitor) 69.

  Subsequently, the display control means 115 clears the ratio blinking flag and sets the value to 0 (step S52). Thereby, other than the part where the lighting is possible (in this embodiment, the lighting possible part DP (dot portion) of each of the first place, tens place and thousands place) of the ratio display (composition ratio monitor) 69, In the case where the display content of the lightable portion is blinked, the operation is started from lighting when the power is turned on.

  Subsequently, the display control means 115 clears the dot lighting flag and sets the value to 0 (step S53). Thereby, the display contents of a part of the ratio indicator (combination ratio monitor) 69 that can be lit (in this embodiment, the lit part DP (dot portion) at each of the first place, tens place, and thousands place). When blinking is displayed, it starts from lighting when power is turned on.

  Subsequently, the display control unit 115 sets a display switching timer (step S54). When a value corresponding to, for example, 5 seconds is set in the display switching timer, the display items (1) to (5) (see FIG. 14) displayed on the ratio display 69 are switched every 5 seconds. .

  Subsequently, the display control unit 115 sets a ratio blink timer (step S55). When a value corresponding to, for example, 0.3 seconds is set in the ratio blink timer, the on / off state is switched every 0.3 seconds.

  Subsequently, the display control means 115 sets a dot blink timer (step S56). Then, the process returns to the power-on process shown in FIG. When a value corresponding to, for example, 0.1 second is set in the dot blink timer, the lighting and the extinguishing are switched every 0.1 second. However, in the present embodiment, a value smaller than the value set in the ratio blink timer is set in the dot blink timer. As a result, the blinking interval of the above-mentioned part of the lightable portions of the ratio display 69 becomes shorter than the blinking interval of the other lightable portions of the ratio display 69 excluding the part of the lightable portions. In other words, the blinking speed of the above-mentioned part of the lightable portions of the ratio display 69 becomes faster than the blinking speed of the other lightable portions of the ratio display 69 excluding the part of the lightable portions.

1.3. Setting Change Processing The setting change processing (step S7) in FIG. 18 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The setting control unit 101 determines whether a backup failure of the RWM of the main CPU 61 has been set (step S101). This determination processing is to determine that the RWM backup failure is set when the RWM backup failure is set in step S37 of FIG.

  If it is determined that the backup failure has not been set (NO in step S101), the setting control unit 101 reads the set value information (step S102), and proceeds to step S106.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the backup failure is set (YES in step S101), the payout display control unit 118 performs display control to display “C” on the set value display 56 (step S103). Then, the setting control means 101 determines whether or not the setting change button 50c is on (step S104). If it is determined that the setting change button 50c has not been turned on (NO in step S104), the state will be a standby state. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting change button 50c is on (YES in step S104), the setting control unit 101 sets setting 1 (step S105), and proceeds to step S106.

  In step S106, the setting control unit 101 determines whether the setting change button 50c is on. When it is determined that the setting change button 50c is turned on (YES in step S106), the setting control unit 101 updates the setting value (step S107), and returns to step S106.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting change button 50c has not been turned on (NO in step S106), the setting control unit 101 determines whether an operation of the start lever (start switch 19) has been detected (step S106). S108). When it is determined that the operation of the start lever (start switch 19) has not been detected (NO in step S108), the process returns to step S106. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation of the start lever (start switch 19) has been detected (YES in step S108), the setting control unit 101 determines whether or not the setting change key switch 50b is off (step S109). ). When it is determined that the setting change key switch 50b is not in the OFF state (NO in step S109), the state is changed to the standby state. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting change key switch 50b is off (YES in step S109), the setting control unit 101 determines the setting value (step S110), and the setting change process ends.

2. Main Processing The main processing will be described with reference to FIG. However, the main process is a process executed by the main CPU 61. Note that one game is from the start of the setting of the number of medals to the setting of the number of medals for the next game. In other words, one game is from the start of the determination process in step S201 of the main process in FIG. 22 to the time immediately before the processes in steps S202 to S221 are performed and immediately before the determination process in step S201 is performed.

  First, when it becomes possible to set the number of medals, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number of medals (three in this embodiment) have been inserted and whether or not the number of medals has reached a predetermined value (step S201). Then, the process waits until it is determined that the specified number of medals have been inserted (NO in step S201). On the other hand, when it is determined that the specified number of medals have been inserted (YES in step S201), it is determined whether the start switch 19 has been operated (step S202). It waits until it is determined that the start switch 19 has been operated (NO in step S202), and if it is determined that the start switch 19 has been operated (YES in step S202), the lottery process by the role lottery means 103 is executed (step S202). Step S203).

  In step S203, the combination lottery means 103 sets a lottery flag including a 3-bit advantageous section lamp lighting timing flag based on the combination lottery result. In this embodiment, when the winning combination group "middle cherry" is won as the advantageous section lamp lighting timing flag, 1 is set to only the first bit ("010"), and the winning combination group "common bell 1" is set. If a winning is made, 1 is set only in the 0th bit (“001”), otherwise, 0 is set in all bits (“000”).

  In step S203, the gaming state setting means 100b shifts from the non-AT permitted state to the AT permitted state when the winning combination group "middle cherry" or "common bell 1" is won in the game in the AT non-permitted state. Then, a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) is given as the number of games in the AT allowable state and set in the AT remaining game number counter 654, and the predetermined number of games in one AT allowable state is set as the maximum number of games. The number (for example, 1500) is set in the AT continuous game number counter 655, and the gaming state of the slot machine 1 is set to the AT allowable state. In addition, in the game in the AT allowable state, the gaming state setting means 100b determines whether to increase the number of games in the AT allowable state when one of the winning combination groups “common bell 2”, “CB”, and “replay” is won. A lottery is performed, and the number of games according to the lottery result is added to the AT remaining game number counter 654.

  In step S203, the command creating unit 108 creates a command including contents indicating a gaming state such as an AT non-permissible state and an AT allowable state, contents indicating a winning combination group number (“0” to “10”), and the like. Then, the created command is transmitted from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71. Here, if the received command is an AT non-permissible state and a command indicating “No. 5” (winning role group “Middle Cherry”), the effect content determining means 202 of the sub CPU 71 sets the AT allowable shift determining effect to a stop switch. Is determined to be performed at a timing after the first stop operation with respect to. If the received command is an AT non-permissible state and a command indicating “No. 9” (winning role group “Common Bell 1”), the effect content determination means 202 performs the AT allowable transition determination effect on all reels 13L and 13M. , 13R is determined to be performed at a timing after the stoppage.

  Then, after the winning lottery process, the rotation of each of the left, center, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is started (step S204). It is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to any of the rotating reels has been operated (step S205), and if it is determined that the stop switch has not been operated (NO in step S205), the operation is performed. Wait until done. In step S205, when the stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R are operated, the command creating means 108 creates a command including the contents indicating the operated stop switch, and the created command is transmitted from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71. Sent to.

  When it is determined that the stop switch corresponding to any of the rotating reels has been operated (YES in step S205), the payout display control unit 118 turns on the advantageous section count flag (contents indicating the count; " 1 ") is determined (step S206). If the advantageous section count flag is ON (YES in step S206), the game is in the AT allowable state (game in the advantageous section), and the process proceeds to step S208. On the other hand, when the advantageous section count flag is not on (NO in step S206), the game is in the AT non-permissible state (game during the section not in the advantageous section), and the payout display control means 118 sets the advantageous section lamp lighting control data setting. Process 1 is executed (Step S207), and the process proceeds to Step S208.

  In the advantageous section lamp lighting control data setting processing 1, the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is set based on the first bit of the advantageous section lamp lighting timing flag. If it is "1", the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is set to "1" (contents indicating the lighting of the advantageous section lamp 47), and if the first bit is "0", the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is set. Do not change the value of. If the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is not ON, the setting of the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is set to “0” (content indicating that the advantageous section lamp 47 is turned off) immediately before the execution of the advantageous section lamp lighting control data setting processing 1. Has become. As described above, the advantageous section lamp lighting control data setting processing 1 sets the advantageous section lamp lighting control data to “1” on condition that the transition from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state due to the winning of the winning combination group “Middle Cherry” is determined. "Is set.

  However, in a game in the AT non-permissible state, when the winning combination group “Middle Cherry” is won and the transition from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state is determined, the first switch for any of the stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R is determined. At the timing after the stop operation, the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is set to "1", and the advantageous section lamp 47 is turned on in the lamp processing (step S435) in the timer interrupt processing of FIG. Further, in step S203, a command indicating the AT non-permission state and “No. 5” (winning group “middle cherry”) is transmitted from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71. At this time, the effect content determination means 202 performs the first stop of the stop switch. It has been determined that an AT allowable transition determination effect is to be performed at a timing after the operation. Then, when a command including the content indicating the stop switch operated in step S205 is transmitted from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 first, the effect display control means 203 of the sub CPU 71 performs an AT allowable shift determination effect. . As described above, when the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is set to “1” and the advantageous section lamps are turned on before all the rotations of the reels 13L, 13M, 13R are stopped, all the reels 13L, 13M, 13R are turned on. Before the rotation stops, an AT allowable transition determination effect is performed.

  Note that the AT allowable transition determination effect may be such that, for example, the first stopped reel performs a special operation, and performs control for delaying the period during which the stop operation of the second reel and thereafter is effective. It may be something.

  By the reel rotation stop control by the reel rotation control means 106, the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch is stopped (step S208). In step S208, when the reels 13L, 13M, and 13R stop, the command creating unit 108 creates a command including the content indicating the stopped reel, and the created command is transmitted from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71.

  Subsequently, a reel error determination process (E5 error) is performed (step S209). The reel error determination process (E5 error) is a process of determining whether each of the reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating normally.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not all the rotations of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, 13R have stopped (step S210). If it is determined that any of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is rotating (NO in step S210), the process returns to step S205. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the rotations of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R have stopped (YES in step S210), the symbol determination unit 109 performs the symbol determination (that is, the winning determination). (Step S211).

  Then, after the symbol determination processing (winning determination processing), game information aggregation processing 1 and game information aggregation processing 2, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, are performed (steps S212 and S213). Subsequently, a medal payout process is executed by the payout control means 110 as needed (step S214).

  Since the game information totaling process 1 and the game information totaling process 2 are performed after the symbol determination process (winning determination process) and before the medal payout process, for example, when a setting change occurs unexpectedly during the payout of medals. However, the game information tallying process has already been performed. For this reason, game inspection information including an operation result (a ratio common to set values, a ratio for each set value: see FIGS. 14 and 16) obtained by performing a predetermined operation using the total data obtained by the game information totaling process. Inspection or confirmation can be easily performed by the inspector, and even if a setting change occurs unexpectedly during the payout of medals, for example, the counting of the counting items can be accurately performed.

  The payout display control means 118 determines whether or not the advantageous section count flag is ON (contents indicating the count; "1") (step S215). If the advantageous section count flag is ON (YES in step S215), the process proceeds to step S217 because the game is in the AT allowable state (game in the advantageous section). On the other hand, if the advantageous section count flag is not on (NO in step S215), the game is in the AT non-permissible state (game in a section that is not an advantageous section), and the payout display control unit 118 sets the advantageous section lamp lighting control data setting. Process 2 is executed (step S216), and the process proceeds to step S217.

  In the advantageous section lamp lighting control data setting processing 2, the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is set based on the 0th bit of the advantageous section lamp lighting timing flag. If it is "1", the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is set to "1" (contents indicating the lighting of the advantageous section lamp 47), and if the 0th bit is "0", the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is set. Do not change the value of. When the advantageous section count flag is not ON, the advantageous section lamp is turned on immediately before the execution of the advantageous section lamp lighting control data setting process 2 except when the winning combination group “middle cherry” is won in the AT non-permissible state. The setting content of the control data is “0” (content indicating that the advantageous section lamp 47 is turned off), and when the winning combination group “Middle Cherry” is won in the AT non-permissible state, the advantageous section lamp lighting control is performed. The data setting content is “1”. As described above, the advantageous section lamp lighting control data setting process 2 sets the advantageous section lamp lighting control data to “on condition that the transition from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state due to the winning of the winning combination group“ common bell 1 ”is performed. 1 ".

  However, if the transition from the non-AT permitted state to the AT permitted state is determined by winning the winning combination group “common bell 1” in a game in the AT non-permitted state, the advantageous section lamp lighting control is performed at the timing after all reels stop. The data is set to “1”, and the advantageous zone lamp 47 is turned on in the ramp process (step S435) in the timer interrupt process of FIG. Further, in step S203, a command indicating the AT non-permissible state and “No. 9” (winning combination group “common bell 1”) is transmitted from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71. It has been determined that an AT allowable transition determination effect is to be performed at the timing. Then, when commands including the contents indicating the stopped reels are transmitted from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 for all reels in step S210, the effect display control means 203 of the sub CPU 71 performs an AT allowable transition determination effect.

  Note that the AT allowable transition determination effect may be such that, for example, the third stop reel performs a special operation, or may perform control for delaying the payout process.

  The payout display control means 118 determines whether or not the advantageous section count flag is ON (contents indicating the count; "1") (step S217). If the advantageous section count flag is not on (NO in step S217), the game is in the AT non-permissible state (game in a section that is not an advantageous section), and the process proceeds to step S221. On the other hand, if the advantageous section count flag is ON (YES in step S217), the game is in the AT allowable state (game in the advantageous section), and the gaming state setting means 219 performs an advantageous section end determination process (step S217). S218).

  In the advantageous section end determination processing, the AT remaining game number counter 654 is decremented by one, and it is determined whether or not the AT remaining game number counter 654 has become zero, and whether or not a winning lottery has been won is determined. It is determined whether or not the value has been decremented to 0. If the winning lottery after the AT remaining game number counter 654 becomes 0 or if the AT continuous game number counter 655 becomes 0, the advantageous section end condition is satisfied (the advantageous section is ended by the game being executed). ), And shifts from the next game to the AT non-permissible state. On the other hand, when neither the AT remaining game number counter 654 nor the AT continuous game number counter 655 is 0, it is determined that the advantageous section end condition is not satisfied (the advantageous section is not ended by the game being executed).

  When the determination result of the advantageous section end determination processing (step S218) does not satisfy the advantageous section end condition (NO in step S219), the payout display control unit 118 proceeds to step S221. On the other hand, when the advantageous section end condition is satisfied (YES in step S219), the payout display control unit 118 performs an advantageous section lamp lighting control data setting process 3 (step S220), and proceeds to step S221. In the advantageous section lamp lighting control data setting processing 3, the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is set to “0” (content indicating that the advantageous section lamp is turned off).

  The counting means 114a performs an advantageous section counting flag setting process (step S221), and returns to step S201. The advantageous section count flag setting processing is performed by setting the advantageous section lamp lighting control data set at the time of the processing as the advantageous section count flag. That is, at the time of the advantageous section count flag setting processing, if the set value of the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is “1” (contents indicating the lighting of the advantageous section lamp 47), the advantageous section count flag is set to “1”. When one game is set to the AT allowable state, that is, counted as a game in the advantageous section, and the set value of the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is “0” (content indicating that the advantageous section lamp 47 is turned off). Sets the advantageous section counting flag to "0" (1 game is not allowed to be counted as an AT allowable state, that is, a game in the advantageous section).

  However, in this embodiment, the advantageous section counting flag setting process is performed after all the rotations of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R are stopped regardless of the setting timing of the advantageous section lamp lighting control data, and Game information for counting various data after all the setting timings of the advantageous section lamp lighting control data in the game have elapsed and until the bet number of medals for performing the next game can be set. This is performed after the aggregation process.

  In addition, although the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is used for the advantageous section count flag setting processing, the present invention is not limited to this. When the advantageous section count flag is “0” (not on), the advantageous section lamp lighting timing is set. The advantageous section count flag is set to “1” when any of the three bits of the flag is “1”, and the advantageous section end condition is set when the advantageous section count flag is “1” (on). When the condition is satisfied, the advantageous section count flag may be set to “0”. Also, a series of processes in steps S206 and S207 and a series of processes in steps S215 and S216 may be performed by the same subroutine process. In this case, when shifting to the subroutine, what bit of the advantageous section lamp lighting timing flag is used is delivered.

  Also, without using the advantageous section lamp lighting control data or the advantageous section lamp lighting timing flag, if the winning combination groups “common bell 1” and “middle cherries” are won in the AT non-permissible state, the advantageous section count flag is set to “ It may be set to “1” and the advantageous section count flag may be set to “0” when the advantageous section end condition is satisfied in the AT allowable state.

  In the case where the winning combination group “Middle Cherry” is won in the AT non-permission state and the transition from the AT non-permission state to the AT permission state is determined, the cherry does not stop on the winning line at the first stop. In such a case, the AT allowable transition determination effect may be performed after stopping all reels.

2.1. Game information totaling process 1
The game information totaling process 1 (step S212) of FIG. 22 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The counting means 114a adds the winning number in the current game to the total payout number in the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. A 400 update process described in detail is performed (step S231).

  The tallying unit 114a determines whether it is in the first-class accessory (for example, BB) (step S232). When it is determined that the character is not in the first-class accessory (NO in step S232), the process proceeds to step S234. On the other hand, when it is determined that the character is in the first-class accessory (YES in step S232), the counting unit 114a determines the continuation of the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. The 400 update process, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 25, is performed by adding the number of winnings in the current game to the number of paid-out items (step S233). Then, the process proceeds to step S234.

  In step S234, the tallying unit 114a determines whether it is in a first-class accessory or a second-class accessory (for example, CB). When it is determined that the character is in the first-class accessory or the second-class accessory (YES in step S234), the process proceeds to step S236. On the other hand, when it is determined that the character is neither a first-class character nor a second-class character (NO in step S234), the counting unit 114a determines whether the character is a normal character (eg, SB) (step S234). Step S235). When it is determined that the character is in the normal accessory (YES in step S235), the process proceeds to step S236. On the other hand, when it is determined that the character is not in the normal accessory (NO in step S235), the process proceeds to step S237.

  In step S236, the tallying unit 114a adds the number of winnings in the current game to the number of bonuses paid out in the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. A 400 update process, which will be described in detail later, is performed using the process, and the process proceeds to step S237.

  In step S237, the counting means 114a determines whether or not the total game number upper limit flag is 0 (that is, the total game number has already exceeded the storage capacity (4 bytes) of the total game number data of FIG. 11). Is determined). When it is determined that the total game number upper limit flag is not 0 (NO in step S237), the process proceeds to step S242. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total game number upper limit flag is 0 (YES in step S237), the tallying unit 114a adds 1 to the total game total number in FIG. Then, the game number updating process described in detail is performed (step S238), and subsequently, it is determined whether or not the total game number upper limit flag is 0 (step S239).

  If it is determined in step S239 that the total game number upper limit flag is not 0 (NO in step S239), the process proceeds to step S242. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total game number upper limit flag is 0 (YES in step S239), the process proceeds to step S240. In addition, in step S239, the case where it is determined that the total game number upper limit flag is not 0 means that the storage capacity of 4 bytes for storing the total number of the total games (common to the set value) in the game is exceeded. In this case, the update processing of the total cumulative data of the number of advantageous section games (common to the set value) (the update processing of the number of games) is not performed, and unless the RAM is cleared, the data stored in the previous game and thereafter is stored. The data of the total cumulative number of the advantageous section games (common to the set value) is maintained.

  If it is determined in step S239 that the total game number upper limit flag is 0 (YES in step S239), the counting unit 114a determines whether or not the advantageous section count flag is ON (“1”) (the advantageous section count flag). Is a content indicating that the current game is counted as the number of advantageous section games). When it is determined that the advantageous section count flag is not ON (contents indicating that counting is not performed) (NO in step S240), the process proceeds to step S242. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section count flag is ON (contents indicating counting) (YES in step S240), the counting unit 114a adds 1 to the number of advantageous section games in FIG. A game number updating process, which will be described in detail later, is performed (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

  In step S242, the counting means 114a sets 19 to the number of ratio calculations.

  Subsequently, the tallying unit 114a performs an updating process of adding 1 to the 400 counter (game number counter 652) (step S243). Then, the tallying unit 114a determines whether the 400 counter is 400 (step S244). Then, when it is determined that the 400 counter is not 400 (NO in step S244), the process returns to the main processing procedure of FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 400 counter is 400 (YES in step S244), the counting unit 114a resets the 400 counter to 0, and sets 23 to the number of ratio calculations (step S245). That is, 23 is set as the number of ratio calculations for every 400 games, and the advantageous section ratio (total: common to the set value), the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games: common to the set value), the accessory ratio (6000 games: common to the set value) , Continuous bonus ratio (total: common to set value), bonus ratio (total: common to set value), ratio by set value (advantageous section ratio of setting 1 to setting 6, continuous bonus ratio of setting 1 to 6, setting) In other games, the ratio calculation frequency is set to 19, and the advantageous section ratio (total: common to the set value) and the ratio by set value (for the other game) are calculated. Only the advantageous section ratios of the settings 1 to 6, the continuous character ratios of the settings 1 to 6, and the (character + AT combination) ratios of the settings 1 to 6 are calculated. Note that the ratio calculation count is decremented by one in the timer interrupt processing of FIG. 29 (for details, see step S675 of FIG. 33), and at the end of the next game in which the ratio calculation count is newly set. By this time, sufficient time has elapsed for all calculations to be completed.

  Subsequent to step S245, the counting means 114a accumulates the total payout number from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. 11 and stores the result of the accumulation in the cumulative PS as the total payout number for the latest 6000 games. A 6000 update process, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 27, is performed for every 400 games (step S246). Subsequently, the tallying unit 114a accumulates the number of consecutive bonuses to be paid from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. 11, and stores the cumulative result in the cumulative PS as the number of consecutive bonuses for the latest 6000 games. A 6000 update process, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 27, is performed for every 400 games (step S247). Subsequently, the counting means 114a accumulates the number of the payouts of the bonuses from the first term P1 to the fifteenth term P15 in FIG. 11 and stores the accumulation result in the cumulative PS as the number of the payouts of the latest 6000 games. A 6000 update process, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 27, is performed for every 400 games (step S248).

  Subsequent to step S248, the counting means 114a determines whether or not the total payout upper limit flag is 0 (that is, the data of the total payout number of the total cumulative payout number in FIG. 11 is already the storage capacity (4 bytes). Is determined (step S249). If it is determined that the total payout upper limit flag is not 0 (NO in step S249), the process proceeds to step S254.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the total payout upper limit flag is 0 (YES in step S249), the counting means 114a adds the total payout number of the total cumulative number of payouts in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. The total payout number of the total total is updated by adding the total payout number of the period corresponding to the ring pointer (the total payout number of the latest 400 games). The cumulative update processing described in detail later with reference to FIG. , Every 400 games (step S250).

  Subsequently, in step S251, the tallying unit 114a determines whether or not the total payout upper limit flag is 0, and if it is not 0 (NO in step S251), the process proceeds to step S254. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total payout upper limit flag is 0 (YES in step S251), the process proceeds to step S252. In step S251, the case where it is determined that the total payout upper limit flag is not 0 means that the total payout number (common to the set value) in the game (update timing to visit every 400 games) is stored. This is the case where the storage capacity of bytes has been exceeded. In this case, the processing of updating the cumulative total of the number of consecutive bonus articles (common to the set value) (game number updating processing) and the number of consecutive bonus articles (common to the set values) ) Is not performed, and unless the RAM is cleared, the total number of payouts (set value common) stored at the update timing immediately before the update timing is not updated unless the RAM is cleared. The data and the total accumulated data of the number of paid-out articles (common to set values) are maintained.

  If it is determined in step S251 that the total payout upper limit flag is 0 (YES in step S251), the tallying unit 114a sets the total cumulative number of consecutive bonuses to be paid in FIG. 11 from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15. The total cumulative number of consecutive bonuses to be paid is updated by adding the number of consecutive bonuses to be paid (the number of consecutive bonuses to be paid for the latest 400 games) in the period corresponding to the ring pointer out of FIG. A cumulative update process, which will be described in detail later, is performed for every 400 games (step S252). Subsequently, the tallying unit 114a adds the number of bonuses to be paid in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 (for the last 400 games) A total update processing of updating the total cumulative number of paid-out articles by adding the number of paid-out articles is performed for every 400 games (step S253), which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 28 (step S253). move on.

  In step S254, the counting unit 114a updates the ring pointer. The ring pointer indicates the first period P1, the second period P2, the third period P3,..., The fourteenth period P14, the fifteenth period P15, the first period P1, the second period P2,. In other words, it is updated every 400 games so as to indicate the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 while repeating the sequence.

  The counting unit 114a determines whether the ring pointer update result is 0, that is, whether the ring pointer has returned to the initial position (step S255). When it is determined that the ring pointer update result is not 0 (NO in step S255), the process proceeds to step S257. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ring pointer update result is 0 (YES in step S255), the counting unit 114a determines that the number of games since installation or after RWM clear has reached 6000 games, and thus the 6000 reaching flag is set to $ FF. (Hexadecimal notation) is set (step S256), and the process proceeds to step S257. The 6000 arrival flag is set to $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) at the time of installation or RWM clear.

  The counting means 114a clears the total payout number (the oldest payout number for the 400 games) of the period corresponding to the updated ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. Is set to 0 (step S257). Subsequently, the counting means 114a calculates the number of consecutive payouts (the oldest number of consecutive payouts for 400 games) for the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. The value is cleared to 0 (step S258). Subsequently, the tallying unit 114a clears the number of bonuses paid out in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. To set the value to 0 (step S259). Then, the process returns to the procedure of the main process in FIG.

2.2. Game information totaling process 2
The game information totaling process 2 (step S213) in FIG. 22 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The totalizing unit 114a determines whether or not the total payout upper limit flag corresponding to the set value set by the setting control unit 101 is 0 (that is, the total payout number of the current set value is equal to the total payout of the set value in FIG. 12). It is determined whether or not the number of data has already exceeded the storage capacity (4 bytes) (step S281). If it is determined that the total payout upper limit flag is not 0 (NO in step S281), the process proceeds to step S290.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the total payout upper limit flag corresponding to the set value set by the setting control unit 101 is 0 (YES in step S281), the totaling unit 114a performs the total payout of the set value in FIG. The total payout number of the set value is updated by adding the number of medals paid out by winning the small role to the number of payouts (step S282). This update is performed every game.

  Next, the tallying unit 114a determines whether or not the total payout upper limit flag for the set value is 0 (step S283). Here, when it is determined that the total payout upper limit flag (for each setting) is not 0 (NO in step S283), the process proceeds to step S290, and when it is determined that it is 0 (YES in step S283), step S284. Proceed to. In step S283, when it is determined that the total payout upper limit flag (for each setting) is not 0, the storage capacity of 4 bytes for storing the total sum of the total payout number of the setting in the game is exceeded. In this case, in this case, the process of updating the total cumulative data of the number of consecutive bonus articles (for each setting) (the number-of-games updating process), and the processing of updating the total cumulative data of the number of bonus articles and the number of AT bonuses (for each setting). Unless the update process (game number update process) is performed and the RAM is not cleared, the total cumulative data of the number of consecutive bonus payouts (by setting) stored in the previous game and the number of the bonus + AT payouts unless the RAM is cleared. The total cumulative data (by setting) is maintained.

  If it is determined in step S283 that the total payout upper limit flag for the set value is 0 (YES in step S283), the counting means 114a determines whether or not a first-class accessory (for example, BB) is being performed (step S283). Step S284). If it is determined that it is not a first-class accessory (NO in step S284), the process proceeds to step S286. On the other hand, when it is determined that the player is in the first-class role (YES in step S284), the counting unit 114a adds the number of medals paid out by the prize to the continuous number of payables with the set value in FIG. Is added to update the number of consecutive bonus articles to be paid with the set value (step S285). This update is performed every game.

  In step S286, the tallying unit 114a determines whether it is in a first-class accessory or a second-class accessory (for example, CB). Here, when it is determined that the character is in the first-class accessory or the second-class accessory (YES in step S286), the process proceeds to step S289. On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the first-class accessory nor the second-class accessory (NO in step S286), the counting unit 114a determines whether or not the AT period is in progress (step S287). In this determination, the counting means 114a determines the ON / OFF state of the flag during the AT period, and if the flag is set to ON, determines that it is during the AT period.

  If it is determined in step S287 that it is during the AT period (YES in step S287), the tallying unit 114a determines the winning combination group “left bell”, “middle bell”, “right bell” (presses) in the role lottery. It is determined whether or not an advantageous push order has been notified based on the AT period (step S288), and the push order bell has been elected and the advantageous push order has been notified. If it is determined that the medals have been paid (YES in step S288), the tallying unit 114a adds the number of medals paid out by the prize to the bonus + AT combination payout number of the set value in FIG. Is updated (step S289). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S287 that the AT period is not during the AT period (NO in step S287), and in step S288, the push order bell has not been won or the push order bell has been won, but it is advantageous. If it is determined that the pressing order is not notified (NO in step S288), the process proceeds to step S290.

  In step S290, the counting means 114a determines whether or not the total game number upper limit flag of the set value set by the setting control means 101 is 0 (that is, the total game number is equal to the total game number of the set value in FIG. 12). It is determined whether the data has already exceeded the storage capacity (4 bytes). When it is determined that the total game number upper limit flag is not 0 (NO in step S290), the game information totaling process 2 is ended, and the process proceeds to step S214 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total game number upper limit flag is 0 (YES in step S290), the tallying unit 114a adds 1 to the total game number of the set value in FIG. 12, using FIG. A game number update process, which will be described in detail later, is performed (step S291), and the process proceeds to step S292.

  In step S292, the counting means 114a determines whether or not the total game number upper limit flag of the set value set by the setting control means 101 is 0. Here, if it is determined that the total game number upper limit flag is not 0 (NO in step S292), the game information totaling process 2 is ended, and the process proceeds to step S214 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total game number upper limit flag is 0 (YES in step S292), the process proceeds to step S293. If it is determined in step S292 that the total game number upper limit flag (for each setting) is not 0, the storage capacity of 4 bytes for storing the total cumulative number of the total games (for each setting) in the game is determined. In this case, the process of updating the total cumulative data of the number of advantageous section games (for each setting) (the number of games to be updated) is not performed, and unless the RAM is cleared, the data is stored in the previous game and thereafter. The data of the total accumulated number of the advantageous section games (for each setting) is maintained.

  In step S293, the counting unit 114a determines whether or not the advantageous section count flag is ON (“1”) (whether or not the advantageous section count flag indicates that the current game is counted as the number of advantageous section games). ) Is determined. When it is determined that the advantageous section count flag is not on (contents indicating that counting is not performed) (NO in step S293), the game information totaling process 2 ends, and the process proceeds to step S214 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section count flag is ON (contents indicating counting) (YES in step S293), the counting unit 114a adds 1 to the number of advantageous section games of the set value in FIG. A game number update process, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 26, is performed (step S294), and the process proceeds to step S214 in FIG.

  It should be noted that the timer interrupt prohibition process may be performed immediately before the game information totalization process 1 is started, and the timer interrupt permission process may be performed after the game information totalization process 2 ends. In this case, a timer interrupt occurs during the tallying, so that one of the game information tallying processing for the common set value and for each set value is updated based on the result of the game, It is possible to prevent a situation in which the other side has not been updated based on the result of the game, and the update including the result of the game can be reliably performed in both the tallying processes.

2.3.1. 400 Update Processing The 400 update processing (steps S231, S233, and S236) in FIG. 23 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The counting means 114a acquires the RWM address corresponding to the ring pointer (step S311), adds the winning number in the current game to the value of the acquired RWM address (step S312), and performs the game information aggregation processing 1 in FIG. It returns to the processing procedure of.

  However, the RWM address corresponding to the ring pointer is the total payout number in the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. In the 400 update process relating to the number of consecutive bonuses to be paid out in step S233, the consecutive combination of the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. This is the address of the storage area where the number of articles to be paid is stored. In the 400 update process related to the number of articles to be paid out in step S236, the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. This is the address of the storage area in which the number of the paid-out articles is stored.

2.3.2. Game Number Update Processing The game number update processing (steps S238 and S241) in FIG. 23 and the game number update processing (steps S291 and S294) in FIG. 24 will be described with reference to FIG.

  Here, in the game number update process related to the total game number in step S238, 4 bytes of the total game number in the total cumulative number in FIG. 11 are to be updated, and in the game number update process related to the advantageous section game number in step S241, FIG. 4 bytes of the total cumulative number of advantageous section games are to be updated, and in the game number updating process relating to the total number of games in step S291, the total game number of the set value set by the setting control means 101 in FIG. The byte is an update mode, and in the game number update process related to the number of advantageous section games in step S294, 4 bytes of the number of advantageous section games of the set value set by the setting control unit in FIG. 12 are to be updated.

  The tallying unit 114a stores the 4-byte value of the RWM 65 to be updated in a predetermined storage area (predetermined address (storage RWM address): 4 bytes) of the RWM 65 (step S330).

  Subsequently, the counting unit 114a performs an update process of adding 1 to the value of the lower 2 bytes of the 4 bytes of the RWM 65 to be updated (step S331). Then, the counting means 114a determines whether or not the update result of the lower 2 bytes (that is, the value of the updated lower 2 bytes) is 0 (step S332). When it is determined that the update result is not 0 (NO in step S332), the process returns to the game information totaling process 1 of FIG. 23 or the game information totalizing process 2 of FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the update result of the lower 2 bytes is 0 (YES in step S332), since the carry has occurred, the counting unit 114a sets the upper 2 bytes of the 4 bytes of the RWM 65 to be updated. An update process of adding 1 to the byte value is performed (step S333), and the process proceeds to step S334.

  Then, the tallying unit 114a determines whether or not the update result of the upper 2 bytes (that is, the value of the updated upper 2 bytes) is 0 (step S334). When it is determined that the update result is not 0 (NO in step S334), the process returns to the game information totaling process 1 in FIG. 23 or the game information totaling process 2 in FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the update result of the upper 2 bytes is 0 (YES in step S334), the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of 4 bytes before the update exceeds the maximum value 2 ³² -1 that can be represented by 4 bytes. Therefore, the counting means 114a sets $ FF (hexadecimal notation) in the total game number upper limit flag (step S335). The total game number upper limit flag is set to $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) at the time of installation or RWM clear.

  Subsequent to step S335, the tallying unit 114a sets the value of the storage RWM address in the first to fourth bytes of the RWM 65 to be updated before updating (step S336), and the game information tallying process 1 in FIG. Alternatively, the process returns to the game information totaling process 2 of FIG. Here, the process of setting the value of the storage RWM address before the update is performed without updating the value in the game that has exceeded the storage capacity of the update target RWM 65, and using the value stored in the update target RWM 65 in the previous game. This is the process of returning. In addition, since the total game number upper limit flag is set to ON in the game (step S335), except for the case where the RWM is cleared, the total game number (common to the set value, by setting) is calculated except for the game. The data and the cumulative data of the number of advantageous section games (common to the set value, per set) are not updated. In other words, in subsequent games including a game that has exceeded the storage capacity of the RWM 65 to be updated, the data of the RWM 65 to be updated stored in the game before the exceeded game is maintained.

  In this embodiment, the game number update process related to the total game number and the game number update process related to the advantageous section game number are performed in the same subroutine. Therefore, this subroutine has functions related to the advantageous section. It is designed to be executed even for models that do not. On the other hand, if the game number update process related to the total game number and the game number update process related to the advantageous section game number are performed in separate subroutines, if the model does not have the function related to the advantageous section, The subroutine for the number-of-games update process relating to the number of advantageous section games is not executed, resulting in a so-called “unused program”. However, in the present embodiment, the game number update process related to the total game number and the game number update process related to the advantageous section game number are performed in the same subroutine. Therefore, this subroutine has a function related to the advantageous section. Even if the model is not used, it does not become an “unused program”, and even if the model has a different performance, the program can be diverted and the burden on development can be reduced.

  Also, in the number-of-games updating process relating to the advantageous section number of games, a processing step of setting the total number-of-games upper limit flag is included. $ FF (hexadecimal notation) is set, and $ FF (hexadecimal notation) is not set to the total game number upper limit flag in the game number update process related to the number of advantageous section games.

  In this embodiment, in steps S331 and S333, the address of the RWM 65 to be updated is directly rewritten. However, for example, an aggregation address is separately set in the RWM 65, and the processing in steps S331 to S334 is performed using the address. May be performed, and the value of the RWM 65 to be updated may be updated based on the tally result.

2.3.3. 6000 Update Process The 6000 update process (steps S246, S247, S248) in FIG. 23 will be described with reference to FIG.

  Here, in the 6000 update process related to the total payout number in step S246, the RWM addresses of the storage area (2 bytes) of the total payout number in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. 11 are sequentially added. The RWM address is the RWM address, and the RWM address in the storage area (3 bytes) of the total payout number of the cumulative PS shown in FIG. 11 is the augmented address. Further, in the 6000 update process relating to the number of consecutive bonus articles to be paid in step S247, the RWM address of the storage area (2 bytes) of the number of consecutive bonus articles to be paid in each period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. The added RWM address is in order, and the RWM address in the storage area (3 bytes) of the consecutive PS payout number of cumulative PS in FIG. 11 is the added address. Further, in the 6000 update process relating to the number of paid-out articles in step S248, the RWM addresses of the storage area (2 bytes) of the number of paid-out articles in each period from the first term P1 to the fifteenth term P15 in FIG. The added RWM address is used, and the RWM address of the storage area (3 bytes) of the number of paid-out articles of the cumulative PS in FIG. 11 is the added address.

  The counting means 114a clears the 3 bytes of the augmented RWM address and sets the value to 0 (step S351).

  Since the accumulation target is fifteen periods from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15, the counting means 114a sets the number of repetitions to fifteen, and sets the number of repetitions to fifteen, and the first period from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 The address of the storage area of P1 is set as the added RWM address (step S352).

  Then, the counting means 114a updates the value of the lower 2 bytes of the added RWM address by adding the value of 2 bytes of the added RWM address to the value of the lower 2 bytes of the added RWM address (step S353). Then, the counting means 114a determines whether or not the calculation result has been carried (that is, whether or not a carry has occurred) (step S354). Then, when it is determined that the calculation result is not a carry-on (NO in step S354), the process proceeds to step S356. On the other hand, when it is determined that the calculation result is a carry-on (YES in step S354), the counting unit 114a adds 1 to the value of the third byte of the augmented RWM address, thereby adding the value of the third byte of the augmented RWM address. Update (step S355) and proceed to step S356.

  In step S356, the tallying unit 114a updates the added RWM address. Here, the addition RWM address is updated, for example, so that the addition target is updated in the next period.

  Subsequent to step S356, the counting means 114a subtracts 1 from the number of repetitions (step S357), and determines whether the number of repetitions is 0 (step S358). If it is determined that the number of repetitions is not 0 (NO in step S358), the process returns to step S353 because the accumulation process from the first term P1 to the fifteenth term P15 has not been completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of repetitions is 0 (YES in step S358), since the accumulation processing from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 has been completed, the game information totaling process 1 in FIG. It returns to the processing procedure of. In this way, the values from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period are accumulated, and the accumulation result is stored in the accumulated PS.

2.3.4. Cumulative Update Processing The cumulative update processing (steps S250, S252, S253) in FIG. 23 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The counting means 114a acquires the RWM address (addition RWM address) corresponding to the ring pointer (step S370). However, as the RWM address corresponding to the ring pointer, in the cumulative update process relating to the total payout number in step S250, the total payout number in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. Of the storage area (2 bytes) is obtained, and in the cumulative update process related to the number of consecutive bonus articles to be paid out in step S252, the ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. Is obtained, the address of the storage area (2 bytes) of the number of consecutive bonuses to be paid in the period corresponding to the period is acquired. In the cumulative update process related to the number of bonuses to be paid out in step S253, the first period P1 to the first period in FIG. The address of the storage area (2 bytes) of the number of paid-out articles in the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the fifteenth period P15 is obtained.

  Subsequent to step S370, the counting means 114a stores the value of the augmented RWM address (4 bytes) in the storage RWM address (4 bytes) (step 371). However, in the cumulative update processing related to the total payout number in step S250, 4 bytes of the total cumulative payout number in FIG. 11 is the 4 bytes of the added RWM address, and the cumulative update related to the continuous payout number in step S252 is performed. In the process, the 4 bytes of the total number of consecutive bonuses of the bonus total in FIG. 11 are 4 bytes of the RWM address to be added, and in the cumulative update process related to the number of bonuses to be paid out in step S253, the total cumulative number of bonuses in FIG. Four bytes of the number of articles to be paid out are four bytes of the added RWM address.

  Subsequent to step S371, the counting means 114a updates the value of the lower 2 bytes of the add-on RWM address by adding the value of the added RWM address to the value of the lower 2 bytes of the add-on RWM address (step S372). However, in the cumulative update process related to the total payout number in step S250, the lower 2 bytes of the total cumulative payout number in FIG. 11 are the lower 2 bytes of the added RWM address, and the lower 2 bytes in step S252 relate to the continuous payout number. In the cumulative update process, the lower 2 bytes of the total number of consecutive bonuses of the total bonuses in FIG. 11 are the lower 2 bytes of the RWM address to be added. The lower 2 bytes of the total cumulative number of the paid-out articles are the lower 2 bytes of the added RWM address.

  Then, the counting means 114a determines whether or not the calculation result in step S372 is a carry, that is, whether or not a carry has occurred (step S373). When it is determined that the calculation result is not a carry-on (NO in step S373), the process returns to the game information totaling process 1 in FIG. On the other hand, when the calculation result is determined to be a carry-on (YES in step S373), the counting means 114a updates the augmented RWM address (step S374). However, the updated RWM address is the address of the upper 2 bytes of the total payout number in FIG. 11 in the cumulative update processing of the total payout number in step S250, and the continuous payout number in step S252. 11 is the address of the upper 2 bytes of the total number of consecutive bonuses for the total number of consecutive bonuses in FIG. 11, and in the cumulative update process relating to the number of bonuses to be paid in step S253, the total This is the address of the upper two bytes of the payout number.

  Then, the counting means 114a updates the value of the upper 2 bytes of the added RWM address by adding 1 to the value of the upper 2 bytes of the added RWM address (step S375), and the update result in step S375 is 0. It is determined whether or not the value of the upper 2 bytes is 0 (step S376). When it is determined that the update result is not 0 (NO in step S376), the process returns to the game information totalizing process 1 in FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the update result is 0 (YES in step S376), the result of adding the 2-byte value of the added RWM to the 4-byte value of the added RWM address before the update is the maximum value of 4 bytes. Since it exceeds 2 ³² −1, the counting means 114a sets $ FF (hexadecimal notation) in the total payout upper limit flag (step S377). The total payout upper limit flag is set to $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) at the time of installation or RWM clear. Then, the tallying unit 114a sets the value stored in the storage RWM address from the first byte to the fourth byte, which is the update target of the RWM 65 (step S378), and performs the game information tallying process 1 of FIG. Return to the procedure. Here, the process of setting the value of the storage RWM address before updating is performed for a game that exceeds the storage capacity of the RWM 65 to be updated (data common to setting values: update timing to be visited for every 400, data for each setting value: At the update timing during the game), the update is not performed at the update timing, and the value is returned to the value stored in the RWM 65 to be updated at the immediately preceding update timing. Also, since the total payout upper limit flag is set to ON at the update timing (step S377), the total number of games (the set value) is set at the subsequent update timings including the update timing except when the RWM is cleared. The accumulated data of the common section and the setting (for each setting) and the accumulated data of the number of advantageous section games (common for the setting value and for each setting) are not updated. That is, after the update timing including the update timing exceeding the storage capacity of the update target RWM 65, the data of the update target RWM 65 stored at the update timing immediately before the update timing is maintained.

  In addition, the cumulative update process related to the number of consecutive bonuses and the cumulative update process related to the number of bonuses also include a process step of setting a total payout upper limit flag. First, $ FF (hexadecimal notation) is set in the total payout upper limit flag, and the total game number upper limit flag is set in the cumulative update process related to the continuous number of bonuses and the cumulative update process related to the number of bonuses to be paid. FF (hexadecimal notation) is not set.

  In this embodiment, in step S372 and step S375, the address of the RWM 65 to be updated is directly rewritten. For example, a totaling address is separately set in the RWM 65, and the processing of steps S372 to S376 is performed on the address. May be performed, and the value of the RWM 65 to be updated may be updated based on the tally result.

  The cumulative update process (steps S282, S285, S289) in FIG. 24 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the process of updating the data for each setting (total of the total number of payouts, total of the number of consecutive bonuses, and total of the number of bonuses + AT number of bonuses), instead of step S370 in FIG. The RWM address of each item (total payout number, continuous payout number, and bonus + AT payout number) is acquired. However, as the RWM address of each item, in the cumulative update processing relating to the total payout number (total: by setting value) in step S282, the total payout number set in a place different from the address of the total total by setting in FIG. An RWM address of (for each setting, the relevant game: 2 bytes) is obtained, and in the cumulative update processing relating to the number of consecutive bonuses to be paid out (total: for each setting value) in step S285, the total update for each setting in FIG. The RWM address of the number of consecutive bonuses to be paid (for each setting, the game) set at a location different from the cumulative address is acquired, and the number of bonuses + AT for the same number of ATs in step S289 (total: for each set value) In the cumulative update process according to the above, the RWM address of the bonus item + AT combination payout number (for each setting, the relevant game) set at a location different from the total cumulative address for each setting in FIG. It is is will be. This RWM address becomes the added RWM address in step S372.

  Subsequently, in step S371, the counting means 114a stores the value of the added RWM address (4 bytes) in the storage RWM address (4 bytes). However, in the cumulative update process related to the total payout number (total: by setting value) in step S282 in FIG. 24, 4 bytes of the total total of the total payout number corresponding to the set value set by the setting control unit 101 (see FIG. 12) is the 4 bytes of the augmented RWM address, and in the cumulative update process relating to the number of consecutive bonuses to be paid out in step S285 in FIG. 24, the consecutive bonuses payout corresponding to the set value set by the setting control means 101. The total 4 bytes of the total number of sheets (see FIG. 12) are the 4 bytes of the RWM address to be added, and are set by the setting control means 101 in the cumulative update processing relating to the number of bonuses + AT payouts in step S289 in FIG. A total of 4 bytes (see FIG. 12) of the sum of the bonus and the number of AT payouts corresponding to the set value that is present is 4 bytes of the RWM address to be added.

  Thereafter, the same processing as in steps S372 to S378 in FIG. 28 is performed.

  In addition, the processing step of setting the total payout upper limit flag is also performed in the cumulative update processing related to the number of consecutive bonus articles paid out (total: by setting value) and in the cumulative updating processing related to bonus goods + AT payout number of sheets (total: by setting value). Although it is included, $ FF (hexadecimal notation) is set to the total payout upper limit flag first in the cumulative update processing related to the total payout number (cumulative: according to the set value), and the continuous payout number is $ FF (hexadecimal notation) is not set in the total game number upper limit flag in the cumulative update process related to (total: by set value) and the cumulative update process related to the number of paid-out articles (cumulative: by set value). .

  In this embodiment, in the step S372 and the step S375 of the update process of the total update processing of the data for each setting (the total total of the total number of the paid-out sheets, the total total of the consecutive number of the paid-out sheets, the total total of the number of the bonuses and the number of the AT paid-out sheets). Although the address of the update target RWM 65 is directly rewritten, for example, a totaling address is separately set in the RWM 65, and the processing of steps S372 to S376 is performed on the address, and based on the totaling result, the update target RWM 65 is updated. The value of the RWM 65 may be updated.

3. Timer Interrupt Processing The timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. However, the timer interrupt process in FIG. 29 is a process executed by the main CPU 61.

  First, phase output processing is performed on each of the stepping motors as the left, middle, and right reel motors 14L, 14M, and 14R (step S431). Specifically, excitation data for rotating the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R is output to each of the stepping motors.

  Command transmission processing is performed from the sub-control command transmitting means 111 of the main CPU 61 to the sub-control command receiving means 201 of the sub CPU 71 (step S432). Specifically, this command is a command transmission process from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 which is normally transmitting, and is actually transmitted from the sub control command transmission unit 111 to the sub control command reception unit 201. .

  In the power supply unit including the power switch 50a and the like, it is determined whether or not the power is turned off (the power is cut off, that is, the power supply is stopped) (step S433). If it is determined that the power has been turned off (YES in step S433), a power cutoff process described later in detail with reference to FIG. 30 is performed (step S434), and the timer interrupt process ends.

  If it is determined in the determination process in step S433 that the power has not been turned off (NO in step S433), a ramp process is performed (step S435). Although not particularly shown, this lamp is a bet number display lamp, a re-game display lamp, or the like, and is controlled by the main CPU 61. In the ramp processing in step S435, the payout display control unit 118 sets the advantageous section lamp lighting control data to “1” (content indicating the lighting of the advantageous section lamp) based on the advantageous section lamp lighting control data. In this case, control is performed to turn on the advantageous section lamp 47. If the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is set to "0" (contents indicating that the advantageous section lamp is turned off), the advantageous section lamp 47 is turned off. Control to make it occur.

  Then, port input processing is performed (step S436). This port input processing is performed by a sensor for the main CPU 61 (the insertion sensor 53 of the medal selector 48, the payout sensor 54 and the overflow sensor 57a of the hopper unit 43, the bet switch 15, the maximum bet switch 17, the left / middle / right stop switches 21L and 21M). , 21R, etc.).

  Thereafter, an interrupt process for out-of-use area, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 31, is performed (step S437).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is a transmission command for transmission from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 (step S438). If it is determined that there is no transmission command (NO in step S438), the process proceeds to step S440. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a transmission command (YES in step S438), transmission processing of the set transmission command (input abnormality, dispensing abnormality, door state) is performed (step S439), and the process proceeds to step S440. move on.

  In step S440, it is determined whether or not there is error data. This error data is a flag for the main CPU 61 to report an error (shift to error processing). When the error data is set (turned on), the main CPU 61 shifts to error processing. Things.

  When it is determined that the error data is set (is in the ON state) (YES in step S440), error processing is performed by the game stop unit 113 or the like (step S441), and the timer interrupt processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the error data is not set (not in the ON state) (NO in step S440), a medal insertion determination is performed (step S442), and a medal payout determination is performed (step S443). Timer update processing is performed (step S444), port output processing is performed (step S445), and external signal output processing is performed (step S446).

  Subsequently, the display control means 115 performs the thousands display, the hundreds digits, and the tenths of the ratio display 69 set by performing the respective ratio display settings (FIGS. 34 to 36) in step S536 of FIG. The display of the ratio indicator (combination ratio monitor) 69 is controlled using the set values of the first place and the first place (step S447). Then, control processing of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R (turning drum) is performed (step S448).

3.1. The power interruption process (step S434) in FIG. 29 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the power interruption process in FIG. 30 is a process executed by the main CPU 61.

  A stack pointer is set (step S471). This holds the address of the most recently referenced position in a memory area called a stack. Subsequent to step S471, the power cut flag is set (step S472). A predetermined numerical value is stored. Subsequent to step S472, a checksum value is set (step S473). Then, the processing returns to the processing procedure of the timer interruption processing of FIG.

3.2. Out-of-Use-area Interruption Process The out-of-use-area interrupt process (step S437) of FIG. 29 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the outside-of-use-area interrupt process in FIG. 31 is a process executed by the main CPU 61.

  First, a monitoring process is performed to determine whether or not the selector sensor of the medal selector 48 (specifically, the insertion sensor 53) has an abnormality (step S531). Subsequently, monitoring processing is performed to determine whether or not the payout sensor 54 has an abnormality (step S532). Subsequently, a monitoring process is performed to determine whether there is an abnormality in the open / closed state of the door (specifically, the front door 5) (step S533).

  Then, a ratio display-related timer update process described in detail later with reference to FIG. 32 is performed (step S534). Subsequently, each ratio calculation described in detail later with reference to FIG. 33 is performed (step S535). Subsequently, each ratio display setting described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36 is performed (step S536). Then, the procedure returns to the timer interrupt processing procedure of FIG.

3.2.1 Ratio Display-Related Timer Updating Process The ratio display-related timer updating process (step S534) in FIG. 31 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The display control unit 115 performs an update process of subtracting 1 from the ratio blink timer (step S651). Subsequently, the display control unit 115 determines whether or not the update result (the value of the updated ratio blinking timer) is equal to or greater than 0 (step S652). Then, when it is determined that the update result is 0 or more (YES in step S652), the process proceeds to step S654. On the other hand, when it is determined that the update result is not 0 or more (NO in step S652), the display control unit 115 inverts the ratio blinking flag and sets the ratio blinking timer to the set value of the ratio blinking timer in step S55 of FIG. Is set (step S653), and the process proceeds to step S654. The processing from step S651 to step S653 is executed every time the interrupt processing for out-of-use area in the timer interrupt processing is performed, and the ratio blink flag is set to 0 and 1 every 0.3 seconds, for example, according to the set value of the ratio blink timer. Switch between. Thus, in the present embodiment, a part of the lightable parts (in this embodiment, the lightable parts DP (dot part) of the first place, the tens place, and the thousands place), and other lightable places are displayed. The blinking display can be controlled.

  In step S654, the display control unit 115 performs an update process of decrementing the display switching timer by one. Subsequently, the display control unit 115 determines whether or not the update result is 0 or more (Step S655). When it is determined that the update result of the display switching timer (the value of the updated display switching timer) is equal to or greater than 0 (YES in step S655), the process proceeds to step S657. On the other hand, when it is determined that the update result is not 0 or more (NO in step S655), the display control unit 115 updates the ratio display number and sets the display switching timer to the set value of the display switching timer in step S54 in FIG. Is set (step S656), and the process proceeds to step S657. In the update process of the ratio display number, for example, in the normal state in which the switching flag is set to OFF, the ratio display number is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 0, 1,. As described above, updating is performed while repeating steps 0 to 4 in order. The ratio display number 0 is the display item (1) advantageous section ratio (total: common to the set value), the ratio display number 1 is the display item (2) the continuous character ratio (6000 games: the common set value), the ratio display number 2 Is the display item (3) the ratio of the bonus (6000 games: common to the set value), the ratio display number 3 is the display item (4) the continuous bonus ratio (total: common to the set value), and the ratio display number 4 is the display item (5) This corresponds to the accessory ratio (total: common to set values) (see FIG. 14). Then, the processing from step S654 to step S656 is executed every time the interrupt processing for out-of-use area in the timer interrupt processing is performed, and the ratio display number is updated, for example, every 5 seconds according to the set value of the display switching timer. . As a result, the display contents of the ratio display device 69 are as follows: display item (1) advantageous section ratio (total: common to set value), display item (2) continuous bonus ratio (6000 games: common to set value), display item (3) ) Switching of the main character ratio (6000 games: common to the set value), display items (4) continuous consecutive main character ratio (total: common to the set value), and (5) the main character ratio (cumulative: common to the set value) become.

  On the other hand, in the update processing of the ratio display number in the state where the switching flag is set to ON, the ratio display numbers shown in FIG. 16 are 5, 6, 7, 8,... 20, 22, 22, 5, 5, 6,. As shown in 7..., Updating is performed while repeating steps 5 to 22 in order. In addition, the ratio display number 5 shown in FIG. 16A is a display item (6) advantageous section ratio (setting 1), and the ratio display number 6 is a display item (7) continuous character ratio (setting 1), ratio display number 7 Is the display item (8) (combination + AT combination) ratio (setting 1)... The ratio display number 20 is the display item (21) advantageous section ratio (setting 6), and the ratio display number 21 is the display item (22) continuous combination The product ratio (setting 6) and the ratio display number 22 correspond to the display item (23) (combination + AT combination) ratio (setting 6). Then, the processing from step S654 to step S656 is executed every time the interruption processing for out-of-use area in the timer interruption processing is performed, and the ratio display number is updated, for example, every 5 seconds according to the set value of the display switching timer. . As a result, the display contents of the ratio display 69 are as follows: display item (6) advantageous section ratio (setting 1), display item (7) continuous character ratio (setting 1), display item (8) (character + AT combination) Ratio (setting 1)... Display item (21) advantageous section ratio (setting 6), display item (22) continuous character ratio (setting 6), display item (23) (character + AT combination) ratio (setting Switching is performed while repeating in the order of 6).

  Subsequently, in step S657, the display control unit 115 performs an update process of decrementing the dot blink timer by one. Subsequently, the display control means 115 determines whether or not the update result (the value of the updated dot blink timer) is 0 or more (step S658). Then, when it is determined that the update result is 0 or more (YES in step S658), the process returns to the processing procedure of the outside-use-area interrupt process in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the update result is not 0 or more (NO in step S658), the display control unit 115 inverts the dot blinking flag and sets the dot blinking timer to the set value of the dot blinking timer in step S56 in FIG. Is set (step S659), and the process returns to the processing procedure of the outside-of-use-area interrupt processing in FIG. The processing from step S657 to step S659 is executed each time the interrupt processing for out-of-use area in the timer interrupt processing is performed, and the dot blinking flag is set to 0 and 1 every 0.1 seconds, for example, according to the set value of the dot blinking timer. Switch between. Thus, it is possible to control the blinking display of a part of the ratio display 69 that can be turned on (in the present embodiment, the lightable points DP (dot portion) at the first place, tens place, and thousands place). Become.

3.2.2 Calculation of Each Ratio The calculation of each ratio in FIG. 31 (step S535) will be described with reference to FIG.

  The calculating unit 114b determines whether or not the number of times of ratio calculation is 0 (step S671). If it is determined that the number of ratio calculations is 0 (YES in step S671), all ratios of the type corresponding to the number of ratio calculations finally set in the game information totaling process 1 of FIG. 23 are calculated. Therefore, the process returns to the processing procedure of the interrupt processing for out-of-use area in FIG. That is, when the number of ratio calculations is finally set to 19 in the game information totaling process 1 of FIG. 23, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative: common to the set value), the advantageous section ratio (setting 1), the continuous character ratio ( Setting 1), (Combination + AT combination) ratio (setting 1) to advantageous section ratio (setting 6), continuous combination ratio (setting 6), (combination + AT combination) ratio (setting 6) have already been calculated and the ratio When the number of times of calculation is set to 23, in addition to each calculation ratio when the number of times of ratio calculation is set to 19, an accessory ratio (total: common to set values), a continuous accessory ratio (total: set value) That is, the accessory ratio (6000 games: common to set values) and the continuous accessory ratio (6000 games: common to set values) have already been calculated.

  When it is determined that the number of ratio calculations is not 0 (NO in step S671), the arithmetic unit 114b acquires data corresponding to the value of the ratio calculation frequency from the ratio calculation data table (step S672).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the ratio calculation data table associates “ratio calculation count”, “divisor information”, “divisor byte number”, “dividend information”, and “dividend byte number”. It is a table to be stored.

  Then, as data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “1”, the divisor information “total number of games in setting 1” (total number of games (setting 1 in FIG. 12)), the divisor byte number “4”, and the dividend information “ The number of advantageous section games of setting 1 ”(the number of advantageous section games of FIG. 12 (setting 1)) and the number of bytes of the dividend“ 4 ”are stored in association with each other.

  As the data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “2”, the divisor information “total payout number in setting 1” (total payout number in FIG. 12 (setting 1)), the divisor byte number “4”, and the dividend information “setting 1” The number of consecutive bonus payouts (the number of consecutive bonus payout skills (setting 1) in FIG. 12) and the number of bytes of the dividend “4” are stored in association with each other.

  As the data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “3”, the divisor information “total payout number in setting 1” (total payout number in FIG. 12 (setting 1)), the divisor byte number “4”, and the dividend information “setting 1” In this case, the combination of the bonus item and the number of AT combination payouts ”(the combination of the combination of the combination and the number of AT combination payout skills in FIG. 12 (setting 1)) and the byte number“ 4 ”of the dividend are stored in association with each other.

  As data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “4”, the divisor information “total number of games in setting 2” (total game number (setting 2) in FIG. 12), the divisor number of bytes “4”, and the dividend information “setting 2” (The number of advantageous section games of FIG. 12 (the number of advantageous section games of FIG. 12 (setting 2)) and the number of bytes of the dividend “4” are stored in association with each other.

  As data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “5”, the divisor information “total payout number of setting 2” (total payout number in FIG. 12 (setting 2)), the divisor byte number “4”, and the dividend information “setting 2” The number of consecutive bonus payouts ”(the number of consecutive bonus payout techniques (setting 2) in FIG. 12) and the number of bytes of the dividend“ 4 ”are stored in association with each other.

  As data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “6”, the divisor information “total payout number of setting 2” (total payout number (setting 2) in FIG. 12), the divisor number of bytes “4”, and the dividend information “setting 2” The combination of the character and the number of AT combination payouts ”(the combination of the combination of the combination and the number of AT combination payouts in FIG. 12 (setting 2)) and the byte number“ 4 ”of the dividend are stored in association with each other.

  As data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “7”, the divisor information “total number of games in setting 3” (total number of games (setting 3 in FIG. 12)), the divisor byte number “4”, and the dividend information “setting 3” (The number of advantageous section games of FIG. 12 (the number of advantageous section games of FIG. 12 (setting 3)) and the number of bytes of the dividend “4” are stored in association with each other.

  As data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “8”, the divisor information “total payout number in setting 3” (total payout number in FIG. 12 (setting 3)), the divisor byte number “4”, and the dividend information “setting 3” The number of consecutive bonus payouts (the number of consecutive bonus payout skills (setting 3) in FIG. 12) and the number of bytes of the dividend “4” are stored in association with each other.

  As data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “9”, the divisor information “total payout number in setting 3” (total payout number in FIG. 12 (setting 3)), the divisor number of bytes “4”, and the dividend information “setting 3” 12 and the number of bytes of the dividend “4” are stored in association with each other.

  As data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “10”, the divisor information “total number of games of setting 4” (total number of games (setting 4 in FIG. 12)), the divisor byte number “4”, and the dividend information “setting 4” The number of advantageous section games ("the number of advantageous section games of FIG. 12 (setting 4)") and the number of bytes of the dividend "4" are stored in association with each other.

  As data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “11”, the divisor information “total payout number of setting 4” (total payout number in FIG. 12 (setting 4)), the divisor number of bytes “4”, and the dividend information “setting 4” No. of consecutive bonus payouts ”(the number of consecutive bonus payout techniques (setting 4) in FIG. 12) and the number of bytes of the dividend“ 4 ”are stored in association with each other.

  As data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “12”, the divisor information “total payout number in setting 4” (total payout number in FIG. 12 (setting 4)), the divisor byte number “4”, and the dividend information “setting 4” The combination of the character and the number of AT combination payouts ”(the combination of the combination of the combination and the number of AT combination payouts in FIG. 12 (setting 4)) and the byte number“ 4 ”of the dividend are stored in association with each other.

  As data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “13”, the divisor information “total number of games in setting 5” (total number of games in FIG. 12 (setting 5)), the divisor byte number “4”, and the dividend information “setting 5” (The number of advantageous section games of FIG. 12 (the number of advantageous section games of FIG. 12 (setting 5)) and the number of bytes of the dividend “4” are stored in association with each other.

  As the data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “14”, the divisor information “total payout number in setting 5” (total payout number in FIG. 12 (setting 5)), the divisor byte number “4”, and the dividend information “setting 5” (The number of consecutive bonuses to be paid out ”(the number of consecutive bonuses to be paid out (setting 5) in FIG. 12) and the number of bytes of the dividend“ 4 ”are stored in association with each other.

  As data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “15”, the divisor information “total payout number of setting 5” (total payout number in FIG. 12 (setting 5)), the divisor number of bytes “4”, and the dividend information “setting 5” The combination of the character and the number of AT combination payouts (the combination of the combination and the number of AT combination payouts in FIG. 12 (setting 5)) and the byte number of the dividend “4” are stored in association with each other.

  As the data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “16”, the divisor information “total game number of setting 6” (total game number (setting 6) in FIG. 12), the divisor byte number “4”, and the dividend information “setting 6” (The number of advantageous section games of FIG. 12 (the number of advantageous section games of FIG. 12 (setting 6)) and the number of bytes of the dividend “4” are stored in association with each other.

  As data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “17”, the divisor information “total payout number in setting 6” (total payout number in FIG. 12 (setting 6)), the divisor number of bytes “4”, and the dividend information “setting 6” The number of consecutive bonus payouts (the number of consecutive bonus payout skills (setting 6) in FIG. 12) and the number of bytes of the dividend “4” are stored in association with each other.

  As data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “18”, the divisor information “total payout number in setting 6” (total payout number in FIG. 12 (setting 6)), the divisor number of bytes “4”, and the dividend information “setting 6” 12 and the number of bytes of the dividend “4” are stored in association with each other.

  As data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “19”, the divisor information “total games” (total total number of games in FIG. 11), the divisor byte number “4”, and the dividend information “advantage section games” ( The total number of advantageous section games in FIG. 11) and the number of bytes “4” of the dividend are stored in association with each other.

  As the data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “20”, the divisor information “total payout number in the latest 6000 game” (total payout number of cumulative PS in FIG. 11), the divisor byte number “3”, and the dividend information “last 6000” The “number of consecutive bonuses to be paid out in the game” (the number of consecutive bonuses to be paid out of the cumulative PS in FIG. 11) and the number of bytes of the dividend “3” are stored in association with each other.

  As data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “21”, the divisor information “total payout number in the latest 6000 game” (total payout number of cumulative PS in FIG. 11), the divisor byte number “3”, and the dividend information “last 6000” The number of bonuses paid out in the game ”(the number of bonuses paid out of the cumulative PS in FIG. 11) and the number of bytes“ 3 ”of the dividend are stored in association with each other.

  As data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “22”, the divisor information “total payout number in the cumulative game” (total payout number in FIG. 11), the divisor byte number “4”, and the dividend information “the cumulative game The “number of consecutive bonuses to be paid” (the total number of consecutive bonuses to be paid in FIG. 11) and the number of bytes of the dividend “4” are stored in association with each other.

  As the data corresponding to the ratio calculation number “23”, the divisor information “total number of payouts in the cumulative game” (total number of payouts in the cumulative total in FIG. 11), the divisor number of bytes “4”, and the dividend information “the total number of games in the cumulative game” The "number of paid-out articles" (total number of paid-out articles in FIG. 11) and the number of bytes "4" of the dividend are stored in association with each other.

  Subsequent to step S672, the calculation unit 114b performs a ratio calculation process of calculating a ratio corresponding to the value of the ratio calculation count (step S673).

  Subsequent to step S673, the calculating unit 114b sets the value stored in the ratio display work area (described later) by the ratio calculation process of step S673 in the ratio buffer corresponding to the number of ratio calculations (step S674).

  Subsequently, an update process of subtracting 1 from the number of ratio calculations is performed (step S675), and the process returns to the processing procedure of the outside-use-area interrupt process of FIG.

  The ratio buffer corresponding to the ratio calculation number “1” is a buffer for the advantageous section ratio (setting 1) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the advantageous section ratio (setting 1) in FIG. 12). The ratio buffer corresponding to “2” is a buffer for the continuous character ratio (setting 1) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the continuous character ratio (setting 1) in FIG. 12), and the ratio calculation count “3” Is a buffer for (combination + AT combination) ratio (setting 1) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the (combination + AT combination) ratio (setting 1) in FIG. 12).

  The ratio buffer corresponding to the ratio calculation number “4” is a buffer for the advantageous section ratio (setting 2) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the advantageous section ratio (setting 2) in FIG. 12). The ratio buffer corresponding to “5” is a buffer for the continuous character ratio (setting 2) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the continuous character ratio (setting 2) in FIG. 12), and the ratio calculation count “6” Is a buffer for (combination + AT combination) ratio (setting 2) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to (combination + AT combination) ratio (setting 2) in FIG. 12).

  The ratio buffer corresponding to the ratio calculation number “7” is a buffer for the advantageous section ratio (setting 3) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the advantageous section ratio (setting 3) in FIG. 12). The ratio buffer corresponding to “8” is a buffer for the continuous character ratio (setting 3) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the continuous character ratio (setting 3) in FIG. 12), and the ratio calculation count “9” Is a buffer for (combination + AT combination) ratio (setting 3) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to (combination + AT combination) ratio (setting 3) in FIG. 12).

  The ratio buffer corresponding to the ratio calculation number “10” is a buffer for the advantageous section ratio (setting 4) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the advantageous section ratio (setting 4) in FIG. 12). The ratio buffer corresponding to “11” is a buffer for the continuous character ratio (setting 4) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the continuous character ratio (setting 4) in FIG. 12), and the ratio calculation count “12” Is a buffer for (combination + AT combination) ratio (setting 4) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to (combination + AT combination) ratio (setting 4) in FIG. 12).

  The ratio buffer corresponding to the ratio calculation number “13” is a buffer for the advantageous section ratio (setting 5) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the advantageous section ratio (setting 5) in FIG. 12). The ratio buffer corresponding to “14” is a buffer for the continuous character ratio (setting 5) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the continuous character ratio (setting 5) in FIG. 12), and the ratio calculation count “15” Is a buffer for (combination + AT combination) ratio (setting 5) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to (combination + AT combination) ratio (setting 5) in FIG. 12).

  The ratio buffer corresponding to the ratio calculation number “16” is a buffer for the advantageous section ratio (setting 6) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the advantageous section ratio (setting 6) in FIG. 12). The ratio buffer corresponding to “17” is a buffer for the continuous character ratio (setting 6) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the continuous character ratio (setting 6) in FIG. 12), and the ratio calculation count “18” Is a buffer for (combination + AT combination) ratio (setting 6) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to (combination + AT combination) ratio (setting 6) in FIG. 12).

  The ratio buffer corresponding to the ratio calculation number “19” is a buffer for the advantageous section ratio (total: common to the set value) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total cumulative advantageous section ratio in FIG. 11). The ratio buffer corresponding to the ratio calculation number “20” is a buffer for the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games: common to the set value) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the continuous bonus ratio of the cumulative PS in FIG. 11). The ratio buffer corresponding to the ratio calculation number “21” is a buffer for the accessory ratio (6000 games: common to the set value) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the accessory ratio of the cumulative PS in FIG. 11). Further, the ratio buffer corresponding to the ratio calculation number “22” is a buffer for a continuous character ratio (cumulative: common to the set value) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total cumulative continuous character ratio in FIG. 11). The ratio buffer corresponding to the ratio calculation number "23" is a buffer for the accessory ratio (cumulative: common to the set value) (a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total cumulative accessory ratio in FIG. 11).

3.2.3 Each Ratio Display Setting Each ratio display setting (step S536) in FIG. 31 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The display control unit 115 determines whether there is a RAM error (E4 error) (step S701). If an E4 error is determined (YES in step S701), the display control unit 115 sets the first place, tens place, hundreds place, and thousands place of the ratio display 69 to the lighting enabled locations. $ FF (hexadecimal notation) corresponding to all lighting is set (step S702). The set values for the first digit, tens digit, hundreds digit, and thousands digit of the ratio display 69 are set in the 7-segment display process in step S447 in FIG. 29. It is used to turn on or off the lit, hundreds, and thousands places of lightable locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP.

  On the other hand, when it is not determined that the error is the E4 error (NO in step S701), the display control unit 115 determines whether or not the state is the setting change state (step S703), and determines that the state is not the setting change state (step S703). (NO in step S703) proceeds to step S717 in FIG.

  In step S717, the display control unit 115 determines whether or not it is in a state of waiting for medal insertion, and if it is determined that it is in a state of waiting for medal insertion, the ON / OFF state of the door sensor 58 is further determined. It is determined whether or not the front door 5 is in an open state on the basis of (step S718). Subsequently, when the display control unit 115 determines that the front door 5 is in the open state (YES in step S718), the display control unit 115 determines switching from the display of the ratio common to the set values to the display of the ratio for each set value. Is determined whether or not the switching flag is set to ON (step S720). Here, if the switching flag is not set to ON (NO in step S20), the display control unit 115 determines whether the setting change button 50c (reset switch) has been turned ON with the front door 5 opened. Then (step S721), if there is an ON operation (YES in step S721), the switching flag is set to ON (step S722), and the process proceeds to step S723 in FIG. Also, in step S720, when the switching flag has already been set to ON (YES in step S720), the process also proceeds to step S723 in FIG. Note that the above-mentioned state of waiting for medal insertion refers to a state until one or more medals are set as the bet number in step S201 of the main process in FIG. ).

  In step S717, the display control unit 115 performs switching when the medal insertion waiting state is not set (NO in step S717) and when the front door 5 is not set in the open state in step S718 (NO in step S718). The flag is set to OFF (step S719), and the process proceeds to step S704 in FIG.

  Returning to step S704 in FIG. 34, the display control unit 115 performs ratio display data acquisition 1, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S704, the display control unit 115 sets the ratio display number to 1 corresponding to the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games: common to the set value) or 2 corresponding to the bonus ratio (6000 games: common to the set value). It is determined whether or not (step S705). If it is determined that the ratio display number is 1 or 2 (YES in step S705), the process proceeds to step S706, and if it is determined that the ratio display number is neither 1 nor 2 (NO in step S705), the process proceeds to step S706. Proceed to S707.

  In step S706, the display control unit 115 determines whether or not the 6000 arrival flag is 0 (whether or not the number of games since installation or after RWM clear has not reached 6000). If it is determined that the 6000 arrival flag is not 0 (NO in step S706), the process proceeds to step S779. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 6000 arrival flag is 0 (YES in step S706), the process proceeds to step S708.

  In step S707, the display control means 115 determines whether or not the total number of games is greater than 174999. When it is determined that the total number of games is greater than 174999 (YES in step S707), the process proceeds to step S710, and when it is determined that the total number of games is equal to or less than 174999 (NO in step S707). ), And the process proceeds to step S708. In addition, 174999 of the total number of games is an example, and is not limited to this.

  In step S708, the display control means 115 determines whether or not the ratio blinking flag is 0. When it is determined that the ratio blinking flag is 0 (YES in step S708), the process proceeds to step S710. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ratio blinking flag is not 0 (NO in step S708), the display control means 115 turns on the hundreds and thousands places of the ratio display 69, A, B, C, and D, respectively. , E, F, G, and DP, the set value of the lightable portion except for the lightable portion DP (dot portion) at the thousands place is cleared to a value of 0 (step S709), and the process proceeds to step S710.

  When the ratio display number is 1 or 2, when the ratio blinking flag is 0 until the total number of games after the installation or the RWM clear reaches 6000, the ratio display 69 in step S802 in FIG. In the 7-segment display process in step S447 in FIG. 29, the set values for the hundreds place and the thousands place (except for the thousands possible lighting positions DP) are respectively set to the hundreds place and the thousands place. Are used to turn on or off the light-enabled portions of the light-enabled portions A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP except for the light-enabled portion DP at the thousands position. When the ratio blinking flag is 1, the set values for the hundreds and thousands places of the ratio display 69 in step S709 (excluding the thousands possible lighting locations DP) are set to 7 in step S447 in FIG. In the seg display process, the ratio display 69 is illuminated except for the tens of thousands of illuminable locations DP among the tens of thousands illuminable locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP. It is used to turn on or off the possible locations, and the thousands possible locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP of the hundreds and thousands locations are designated. All of the lit locations except the lights are turned off.

  When the ratio display number is 0, 3 or 4, the ratio blinking flag is 0 until the total number of games after the installation or after the RWM clear reaches 175000, and the ratio display in step S802 in FIG. In the 7-segment display processing in step S447 of FIG. 29, the set values for the hundreds and thousands places of the display 69 (excluding the thousands possible lighting locations DP) are displayed. It is used for lighting or extinguishing the illuminable locations other than the thousands of illuminable locations DP among the illuminable locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP of the respective locations. When the ratio blinking flag is 1, the set values for the hundreds and thousands places of the ratio display 69 in step S709 (excluding the thousands possible lighting locations DP) are set to 7 in step S447 in FIG. In the seg display process, the ratio display 69 is illuminated except for the tens of thousands of illuminable locations DP among the tens of thousands illuminable locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP. It is used to turn on or off the possible locations, and the thousands possible locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP of the hundreds and thousands locations are designated. All of the lit locations except the lights are turned off.

  In step S710, the display control unit 115 acquires data corresponding to the ratio display number from the ratio comparison data table. Here, the ratio comparison data table includes the ratio display number, the type of the ratio, and the specified ratio value (a value for judging that an illegal operation has been performed. Judgment) is stored. The type of ratio “advantageous section ratio (cumulative)” and the specified ratio value “70” are stored in association with the ratio display number 0, and the type of ratio “continuous character ratio (6000 games) is associated with the ratio display number 1. : Set value common) and a ratio specified value “70” are stored, and the type of ratio “accessory ratio (6000 games: common set value)” and the ratio specified value “70” are associated with the ratio display number 2. Is stored. In addition, the ratio type “continuous accessory ratio (total: common to the set value)” and the ratio prescribed value “70” are stored in association with the ratio display number 3, and the ratio type “ Actor ratio (total: common to set values) "and ratio stipulated value" 70 "are stored. Note that the ratio specified value 70 is an example, and is not limited to this. The ratio does not need to be the same between the ratios.

  Subsequent to step S710, the display control unit 115 compares the data (the specified ratio value) corresponding to the ratio display number acquired in step S710 with the value of the ratio RWM corresponding to the ratio display number (step S711). Here, when the ratio display number is 0, the value of the ratio RWM corresponding to the ratio display number is the value of the advantageous section ratio (total: common to the set value) (the storage area corresponding to the total cumulative advantageous section ratio of FIG. 11). If the ratio display number is 1, it is the value of the continuous character ratio (6000 games: common to the set value) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the continuous character ratio of the cumulative PS in FIG. 11), If the ratio display number is 2, it is the value of the accessory ratio (6000 games: common to the set value) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the accessory ratio of the cumulative PS in FIG. 11), and if the ratio display number is 3, It is the value of the continuous character ratio (total: common to the set value) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the continuous character ratio of the total total in FIG. 11), and if the ratio display number is 4, the character ratio (total: setting) (Common value) (a value of the storage area corresponding to the total cumulative accessory ratio in FIG. 11).

  Subsequent to step S711, the display control unit 115 determines whether the determination result is a carry-on (step S712). When it is determined that the determination result is a carry (that is, the value of the ratio RWM is less than the acquired data (the specified ratio value)) (YES in step S712), the process proceeds to step S715.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result is not a carry (that is, the value of the ratio RWM is equal to or more than the acquired data (the specified ratio value)) (NO in step S712), the display control unit 115 sets the ratio blinking flag to 0. It is determined whether or not (step S713). When it is determined that the ratio blinking flag is 0 (YES in step S713), the process proceeds to step S715. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ratio blinking flag is not 0 (NO in step S713), the display control means 115 turns on the tens and ones lit positions A, B, C, and D of the ratio display 69. , E, F, G, and DP, the set values of the illuminated locations except for the tens and ones illuminated locations DP (dot portions) are cleared to 0 (step S714), and step S715 is performed. Proceed to processing.

  When the value of the ratio RWM is equal to or greater than the specified ratio value, and when the ratio blinking flag is 0, the set value (one position) for the first place and the tens place of the ratio display 69 in step S811 of FIG. In the 7-segment display process in step S447 in FIG. 29, the light-emitting portions A, B, and C of the first digit and the tens digit of the ratio display 69 are excluded. , D, E, F, G, and DP are used to turn on or off the lightable portions except for the lightable portions DP at the first place and the tens place. When the ratio blinking flag is 1, the set values for the first and tenth digits of the ratio display 69 in step S714 (excluding the lightable portions DP of the first and tenth digits) are shown in FIG. In the 7-segment display process in step S447, the first place and the tenth place of the lit places A, B, C, D, E, F, G and DP of the first and tenth places of the ratio display 69, respectively. It is used to turn on or off the lightable locations except for the lightable locations DP of the respective positions. The light emitting locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP of the first and tens places are respectively used. All of the lit locations except the lit locations DP at the first place and the tens place are turned off.

  The display control means 115 determines whether or not the dot blinking flag is 0 (step S715). Then, when it is determined that the dot blinking flag is 0 (YES in step S715), the process returns to the processing procedure of the outside-of-use-area interrupt processing in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the dot blinking flag is not 0 (NO in step S715), the display control unit 115 sets the first place, the tens place, and the thousands place of the lightable portions DP of the ratio display 69. The value is cleared and the value is set to 0 (step S716), and the process returns to the processing procedure of the outside-of-use-area interrupt processing of FIG.

  Note that when the dot blinking flag is 0, the setting value for the thousandth possible lighting position DP of the ratio display 69 in step S802 in FIG. 37 described later, and the first and tenth digits of the ratio display 69 in step S811. , The set value for the lit position DP of each digit, the set value for the first lit position DP of the ratio display 69 in step S813, and the tens digit DP for the tens digit of the ratio display 69 in step S815. In step S817, the set value for the thousands of possible lighting points DP of the ratio display 69 in step S817 is the first place and the tens place of the ratio display 69 in the 7-segment display process in step S447 in FIG. , And thousands are used to turn on or off the lightable locations DP. However, a value corresponding to turning off is first set in step S802 for the thousands of possible lighting positions DP of the ratio display 69, and a value corresponding to turning on is set in step S817 in the case of YES in step S816. You. In step S811, a value corresponding to turning off is set for the tens lighting enabled portion DP of the ratio display 69, and in the case of YES in step S814, a value corresponding to turning on is set in step S815. You. Further, a value corresponding to turning off is set first in step S811, and a value corresponding to turning on is set in step S813 in the case of YES in step S812, for the first possible lighting position DP of the ratio display 69. You. On the other hand, when the dot blinking flag is 1, the set value for each of the first place, tens place, and thousands place of the lightable portions DP in the ratio display 69 in step S716 is the 7-segment display in step S447 in FIG. In the process, the ratio display 69 is used to turn on or off the first place, the tens place, and the thousands place of each possible lighting DP, and the first place, the tens place, and the thousands place can be turned on. All parts DP are turned off.

  In step S723 of FIG. 36, the display control unit 115 performs ratio display data acquisition 2, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. Subsequent to step S723, the display control means 115 determines whether or not the ratio display number corresponds to a number indicating the continuous character ratio or the (character + AT combination) ratio. The numbers indicating the continuous role ratio or the (roll + AT role) ratio of each set value are 6, 7, 9, 10, 12, 13, 15, 16, 18, 19, 21, 22 (hereinafter referred to as these). Collectively, the ratio display number may be x.). If the ratio display number is x (YES in step S724), the display control unit 115 determines whether the value of the total number of games (see FIG. 12) of the set value corresponding to the ratio number is greater than 17499. (Step S734). In step S734, if the value of the total number of games of the set value corresponding to the ratio display number is larger than 17499 (YES in step S734), the process proceeds to step S729, and if smaller than 17499 (NO in step S734). The process proceeds to step S727.

  Returning to step S724, the display control unit 115 determines whether or not the ratio display number corresponds to a number indicating the advantageous section ratio of each set value. The numbers indicating the advantageous section ratios of the respective set values are 5, 8, 11, 14, 17, and 20 (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as ratio display number = y). If the ratio display number is y (YES in step S725), the display control unit 115 determines whether or not the value of the total number of games (see FIG. 12) of the set value corresponding to the ratio display number is greater than 174999. A determination is made (step S726). In step S726, if it is determined that the value of the total number of games (see FIG. 12) of the set value corresponding to the ratio display number is greater than 174999 (YES in step S726), the flow advances to step S729 to proceed to 174999 or less. If it is determined that there is (NO in step S726), the process proceeds to step S728. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S725 that the ratio display number is not y (NO in step S725), the process returns to the outside-of-use-area interrupt process in FIG. It should be noted that 174999 of the total number of games when the ratio display number is x and 174999 of the total number of games when the ratio display number is y are examples, and are not limited thereto.

  In step S727, the display control means 115 determines whether or not the ratio blinking flag is 0. When it is determined that the ratio blinking flag is 0 (YES in step S727), the process proceeds to step S729. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ratio blinking flag is not 0 (NO in step S727), the display control unit 115 turns on the hundreds and thousands places of the ratio display 69, A, B, C, and D, respectively. , E, F, G, and DP, the set values of the light-enabled portions except the light-enabled portion DP (dot portion) at the thousands place are cleared to 0 (step S728), and the process proceeds to step S729.

  In addition, when the ratio display number is x, when the ratio blinking flag is 0 until the total number of games after the installation or the RWM clear (the total number of games of the set value corresponding to the ratio display number) reaches 17500, the following will be described. The set values for the hundreds and thousands places of the ratio display 69 in step S819 in FIG. 38 (excluding the thousands possible lighting locations DP) are set in the 7-segment display process in step S447 in FIG. Turn on or off the light-enabled portions of the display 69, except for the light-enabled portion DP of the thousands position, among the light-enabled portions A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP of the thousands position. Used to make When the ratio blinking flag is 1, the set values for the hundreds and thousands places of the ratio display 69 in step S728 (except for the thousands possible lighting positions DP) are set to 7 in step S447 in FIG. In the seg display process, the ratio display 69 is illuminated except for the tens of thousands of illuminable locations DP among the tens of thousands illuminable locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP. It is used to turn on or off the possible locations, and the thousands possible locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP of the hundreds and thousands locations are designated. All of the lit locations except the lights are turned off.

  When the ratio display number is y, the ratio blinking flag is 0 until the total number of games after installation or RWM clear reaches 175000. If the ratio blinking flag is 0, the ratio display 69 in step S819 of FIG. In the 7-segment display process in step S447 in FIG. 29, the setting values for the thousands and thousands places (excluding the thousands possible lighting locations DP) are turned on for the hundreds and thousands places of the ratio display 69. It is used for lighting or extinguishing the illuminable locations other than the thousands of illuminable locations DP among the possible locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP. When the ratio blinking flag is 1, the set values for the hundreds and thousands places of the ratio display 69 in step S728 (except for the thousands possible lighting positions DP) are set to 7 in step S447 in FIG. In the seg display process, the ratio display 69 is illuminated except for the tens of thousands of illuminable locations DP among the tens of thousands illuminable locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP. It is used to turn on or off the possible locations, and the thousands possible locations A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP of the hundreds and thousands locations are designated. All of the lit locations except the lights are turned off.

  In step S729, the display control means 115 acquires data corresponding to the ratio display number from the ratio comparison data table. Here, the ratio comparison data table includes the ratio display number, the type of the ratio, and the specified ratio value (a value for judging that an illegal operation has been performed. Judgment) is stored.

  In this embodiment, the ratio type “advantageous section ratio (setting 1)” and the ratio specified value “70” are stored in association with the ratio display number 5, and the ratio type “continuous” is associated with the ratio display number 6. And the ratio specified value “60” is stored, and the ratio type “(local item + AT combination) ratio (setting 1)” and the specified ratio value “70” are associated with the ratio display number 7. Is stored, the ratio type “advantageous section ratio (setting 2)” and the ratio prescribed value “70” are stored in association with the ratio display number 8, and the ratio type “continuous” is associated with the ratio display number 9. The ratio (setting 2) "and the ratio specified value" 70 "are stored in correspondence with the ratio display number 10 and the ratio type" (character + AT combination) ratio (setting 2) ". Are stored in association with the ratio display number 11 and the type of ratio “advantageous section ratio (setting )) And the ratio specified value “70” are stored, and the ratio type “continuous character ratio (setting 3)” and the ratio specified value “60” are stored in association with the ratio display number 12, and the ratio display number is stored. 13 and the ratio specified value “70” and the ratio specified value “70” are stored in association with the ratio type No. 13 and the ratio type “advantageous section ratio (setting 4 )) And the ratio specified value “70” are stored, and the ratio type “continuous character ratio (setting 4)” and the ratio specified value “60” are stored in association with the ratio display number 15, and the ratio display number is stored. The ratio type “(accessory + AT combination) ratio (setting 4)” and the ratio prescribed value “70” are stored in association with the ratio type 16 and the ratio type “advantageous section ratio (setting 5) )) And the specified ratio value “70” are stored and associated with the ratio display number 18. The ratio type “continuous character ratio (setting 5)” and the ratio prescribed value “60” are stored, and the ratio type “(character + AT combination) ratio (setting 5)” and the ratio are associated with the ratio display number 19. The specified value “70” is stored, and the type of ratio “advantageous section ratio (setting 6)” and the specified ratio value “70” are stored in association with the ratio display number 20, and are associated with the ratio display number 21. The ratio type “continuous character ratio (setting 6)” and the ratio prescribed value “60” are stored, and the ratio type “(character + AT combination) ratio (setting 6)” and the ratio are associated with the ratio display number 22. The specified value “70” is stored. The value of the specified ratio value is an example, and is not limited to this.

  Subsequent to step S730, the display control means 115 compares the data (ratio specified value) corresponding to the ratio display number acquired in step S729 with the value of the ratio RWM corresponding to the ratio display number. Here, when the ratio display number is 5, the value of the ratio RWM corresponding to the ratio display number is the value of the advantageous section ratio (setting 1) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the advantageous section ratio (setting 1) in FIG. 12). ), And when the ratio display number is 6, it is the value of the continuous character ratio (setting 1) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the continuous character ratio (setting 1) in FIG. 12), and the ratio display number is 7. In the case of, the value of the (casings + AT combination) ratio (setting 1) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the (casings + AT combination) ratio (setting 1) in FIG. 12), and if the ratio display number is 8, It is the value of the advantageous section ratio (setting 2) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the advantageous section ratio (setting 2) in FIG. 12), and when the ratio display number is 9, the value of the continuous character ratio (setting 2) ( If the ratio display number is 10 (the value of the storage area corresponding to the continuous character ratio (setting 2) in FIG. 12), AT combination) ratio (setting 2) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the (accessory + AT combination) ratio (setting 2) in FIG. 12), and if the ratio display number is 11, the advantageous section ratio (setting 3) ) (The value of the storage area corresponding to the advantageous section ratio (setting 3) in FIG. 12), and when the ratio display number is 12, the value of the continuous character ratio (setting 3) (continuous character in FIG. 12) If the ratio display number is 13, the value of (combination + AT combination) ratio (setting 3) ((combination + AT combination) ratio (setting in FIG. 12) When the ratio display number is 14, the value of the advantageous section ratio (setting 4) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the advantageous section ratio (setting 4) in FIG. 12) is used. If the ratio display number is 15, the value of the continuous character ratio (setting 4) (the continuous character ratio (setting 4) in FIG. 12) If the ratio display number is 16, the value of the (accessory + AT combination) ratio (setting 4) (the storage corresponding to the (accessory + AT combination) ratio (setting 4) in FIG. 12) If the ratio display number is 17, it is the value of the advantageous section ratio (setting 5) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the advantageous section ratio (setting 5) in FIG. 12), and the ratio display number is 17. In the case of 18, it is the value of the continuous character ratio (setting 5) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the continuous character ratio (setting 5) of FIG. 12). 12) The value of the ratio (setting 5) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the (government + AT combination) ratio (setting 5) in FIG. 12), and if the ratio display number is 20, the advantageous section ratio (setting 6) Value (the value of the storage area corresponding to the advantageous section ratio (setting 6) in FIG. 12) and the ratio display number is 21, It is the value of the continuous character ratio (setting 6) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the continuous character ratio (setting 6) in FIG. 12). 6) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the (combination item + AT combination) ratio (setting 6) in FIG. 12).

  Subsequent to step S730, the display control unit 115 determines whether the determination result is a carry-on (step S731). When it is determined that the determination result is a carry (that is, the value of the ratio RWM is less than the acquired data (the specified ratio value)) (YES in step S731), the process proceeds to the outside-use-area interrupt processing step in FIG. Return.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result is not a carry-on (that is, the value of the ratio RWM is equal to or more than the acquired data (the specified ratio value)) (NO in step S731), the display control unit 115 sets the ratio blinking flag to 0. Is determined (step S732). Then, when it is determined that the ratio blinking flag is 0 (YES in step S732), the process returns to the outside use area interrupt processing step in FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ratio blinking flag is not 0 (NO in step S732), the display control means 115 turns on the tens and ones lit positions A, B, C, and D of the ratio display 69. , E, F, G, and DP, the set values of the illuminable locations except for the tens and ones illuminated locations DP (dot portions) are cleared to 0 (step S733), and FIG. The process returns to the step of the outside use area interrupt processing.

  The ratio display data acquisition 1 (step S704) in FIG. 34 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The display control unit 115 acquires display data and display determination data corresponding to the ratio display number from the ratio display data table (step S801). The ratio display data table stores ratio display numbers, ratio types, display data, and display determination data in association with each other. Corresponding to the ratio display number “0”, the type of ratio “advantageous section ratio (cumulative: common to set values)”, display data “$ 27F7” (hexadecimal notation) (binary notation 00100111 11110111, thousands place The lightable locations A, B, C, and F are lit, and the hundreds places lightable locations A, B, C, E, F, G, and DP are lit), and display determination data “1” is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number “1”, the ratio type “continuous character ratio (6000 games: common to setting values)”, display data “$ 7DFC” (hexadecimal notation) (binary notation 01111101 11111100, 1000 In the place, the lightable places A, C, D, E, F, and G are lit, and in the hundreds place, the lightable places C, D, E, F, G, and DP are lit), and the display determination data “1” is stored. Have been. Corresponding to the ratio display number “2”, the type of ratio is “accessory ratio (6000 games: common to set values)”, display data “$ 27FC” (hexadecimal notation) (binary notation 00100111 11111100, thousands place) Indicates that the lit locations A, B, C, and F are lit, and the hundreds digit indicates the lit locations C, D, E, F, G, and DP), and the display determination data “1” is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number “3”, the type of ratio “continuous accessory ratio (total: common to set values)”, display data “$ 7DD8” (hexadecimal notation) (01111101 11011000 in binary notation, thousands place Indicates that the lit locations A, C, D, E, F, and G are lit, and the hundreds digit indicates the lit locations D, E, G, and DP), and the display determination data “1” is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number “4”, the ratio type “continuous accessory ratio (total: common to the set value)”, display data “$ 27D8” (hexadecimal notation) (binary notation 000010111 11011000, thousands place) Indicates that the lit locations A, B, C, and F are lit, and the hundreds digit indicates the lit locations D, E, G, and DP), and the display determination data “1” is stored. However, of the four digits in hexadecimal notation of the display data, the upper two digits correspond to the thousands place of the ratio display 69, and the lower two digits correspond to the hundreds place of the ratio display 69. I do. The display determination data is set by the function of the slot machine, and the display determination data “1” uses the value calculated in the ratio calculation process to display the tens place and the ones place on the ratio display 69. For example, in a slot machine that does not have a function related to an advantageous section, the display determination data stored in association with the ratio display number “0” is “0”.

  The display control means 115 sets the display data acquired in step S801 to the hundreds and thousands places of the ratio display 69 (step S802). For example, when the ratio display number is 0, $ 100 (hexadecimal notation) is set in the hundreds digit of the ratio display 69, and $ 27 (hexadecimal notation) is set in the thousands digit. In step S802, 0 corresponding to turning off is set as the setting value of the thousands of possible lighting positions DP (dot portion) of the ratio display 69.

  Then, the display control unit 115 sets $ 4040 (hexadecimal notation) in the display data (step S803). This process is a process for setting the ratio display at the first place and the tens place of the ratio display 69 in the ratio display number for which the display determination data is 0 to “−−” (only the lightable portion G is lit). is there. By performing the processing of step S803 before step S804 described later, the processing of step S803 is performed even in the slot machine in which the display determination data for all the ratio display numbers is 1. Also, step S803 is executed in this embodiment in which the program for displaying “−−” used in the case of a model that does not have the function related to the advantageous section has the function related to the advantageous section. This is a step for avoiding a so-called “unused program” that is not performed.

  Then, the display control unit 115 determines whether or not the display determination data acquired in step S801 is 0 (step S804). When it is determined that the display determination data is 0 (YES in step S804), the display control unit 115 sets the display data to the first place and the tens place of the ratio display 69, and here, the ratio display 69 $ 40 (hexadecimal notation) is set in the first place and the tens place (step S811). Then, the process proceeds to step S812. In step S811, 0 corresponding to turning off is set as the setting value of the lighting enabled portion DP (dot portion) of each of the first place and the tens place of the ratio display 69.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the display determination data is not 0 (NO in step S804), the display control unit 115 acquires the value of the ratio RWM address corresponding to the ratio display number (step S805). Here, when the ratio display number is 0, the value of the advantageous section ratio (total: common to the set value) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the total cumulative advantageous section ratio in FIG. 11) is acquired, and the ratio display number is 1 In the case of, the value of the continuous character ratio (6000 games: common to the set value) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the continuous character ratio of the cumulative PS in FIG. 11) is obtained. When the value of the ratio (6000 games: common to the set value) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the cumulative PS character ratio in FIG. 11) is acquired, and the ratio display number is 3, the continuous character ratio (total: set value) The value of the common property is acquired (the value of the storage area corresponding to the continuous cumulative proportion of the total in FIG. 11), and when the ratio display number is 4, the value of the special property ratio (cumulative: common to the set value) (FIG. 11) Is obtained in the storage area corresponding to the total sum of the accessory ratios.

  Subsequent to step S805, the display control unit 115 sets $ 6F6F (hexadecimal notation) to the display data (step S806). In this process, when the value of the ratio RWM is 100, the ratio display at the first place and the tens place of the ratio display 69 is set to “99” (lightable places other than the lightable places E and DP are lit). It is processing for.

  The display control unit 115 determines whether or not the value of the ratio RWM address is 100 (step S807). If the value of the ratio RWM is determined to be 100 (YES in step S807), the display control means 115 sets the display data to the first place and the tens place of the ratio display 69, and here, the ratio display $ 6F (hexadecimal notation) is set in the first and tens places of 69, respectively (step S811). Then, the process proceeds to step S812. In step S811, 0 corresponding to turning off is set as the setting value of the lighting enabled portion DP (dot portion) of each of the first place and the tens place of the ratio display 69.

  When it is determined that the value of the RWM of the ratio display 69 is not 100 (NO in step S807), the display control unit 115 calculates the quotient and the remainder by dividing the value of the ratio RWM address by 10 (decimal notation). (Step S808). The value of the quotient in decimal notation is the tens value in decimal notation of the value of the ratio RWM address, and the remaining value in decimal notation is one of the values in decimal notation of the value of the ratio RWM address. The value of the place.

  Then, the display control unit 115 performs display data acquisition processing which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 39 for acquiring the tens place display data (step S809), and subsequently acquires the ones place display data. A display data acquisition process, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 39, is performed (step S810). Then, the display control means 115 sets the first digit display data acquired in step S810 and the tens digit display data acquired in step S809 to the first digit and the tenth digit of the ratio display 69 ( The process proceeds to step S812) and step S812. In step S811, 0 corresponding to turning off is set as the setting value of the lighting enabled portion DP (dot portion) of each of the first place and the tens place of the ratio display 69.

  The display control unit 115 determines whether at least one ratio of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 is equal to or more than a specified ratio value (step S812). Note that the ratio of the ratio display number 3 is a continuous accessory ratio (total: common to set values), and is a value stored in a storage area corresponding to the total cumulative continuous agent ratio in FIG. Further, the ratio of the ratio display number 4 is an accessory ratio (total: common to set values), and is a value stored in a storage area corresponding to the total cumulative accessory ratio in FIG. In addition, the ratio prescribed value for each of the continuous accessory ratio (total: common to the set value) and the accessory ratio (total: common to the set value) is stored in the above-described ratio comparison data table.

  When it is determined that all the ratios of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 are less than the specified ratio value (NO in step S812), the process proceeds to step S814. Note that the set value of the first place where light can be emitted DP of the ratio display 69 remains the value set in step S811, that is, remains at 0 corresponding to turning off. On the other hand, when it is determined that at least one of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 is equal to or greater than the specified ratio value (YES in step S812), the display control unit 115 sets the first place where the ratio display 69 can be lit. 1 corresponding to lighting is set for DP (step S813), and the process proceeds to step S814.

  The display control unit 115 determines whether or not at least one of the ratio display numbers 0 to 4 is equal to or greater than a specified ratio value (step S814). Note that the ratio of the ratio display number 0 is an advantageous section ratio (cumulative total), and is a value stored in the storage area corresponding to the total cumulative advantageous section ratio in FIG. Further, the ratio of the ratio display number 1 is a continuous character ratio (6000 games: common to set values), and is a value stored in the storage area corresponding to the continuous character ratio of the cumulative PS in FIG. Further, the ratio of the ratio display number 2 is an accessory ratio (6000 games: common to set values), and is a value stored in the storage area corresponding to the accessory ratio of the cumulative PS in FIG. The ratio indicated by the ratio display number 3 is a continuous character ratio (total: common to set values), and is a value stored in the storage area corresponding to the continuous character ratio of the total total in FIG. Further, the ratio of the ratio display number 4 is an accessory ratio (total: common to set values), and is a value stored in a storage area corresponding to the total cumulative accessory ratio in FIG. In addition, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative: common to the set value), the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games: common to the set value), the accessory ratio (6000 games: common to the set value), the continuous bonus ratio (total: common to the set value), The specified ratio value for each of the accessory ratios (cumulative: common to set values) is stored in the above-described ratio comparison data table.

  When it is determined that all the ratios of the ratio display numbers 0 to 4 are less than the specified ratio value (NO in step S814), the process proceeds to step S816. Note that the set value of the tens place DP on the ratio display 69 remains the value set in step S811, that is, remains at 0 corresponding to turning off. On the other hand, when it is determined that at least one ratio of the ratio display numbers 0 to 4 is equal to or more than the specified ratio value (YES in step S814), the display control unit 115 switches the tens digit of the ratio display 69 to the illuminable portion. The DP is set to 1 corresponding to lighting (step S815), and the process proceeds to step S816.

  The display control means 115 determines whether or not the total number of games (the value stored in the storage area corresponding to the total number of games in FIG. 11) is less than 175000 (step S816). When it is determined that the total number of games is 175000 or more (NO in step S816), the process returns to the processing procedure of each ratio display setting in FIG. Note that the set value of the thousands of possible lighting positions DP of the ratio display 69 remains the value set in step S802, that is, remains at 0 corresponding to turning off. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number of games is less than 175000 (YES in step S816), the display control unit 115 sets 1 corresponding to lighting to the thousands possible lighting location DP of the ratio display 69. The setting is performed (step S817), and the process returns to the processing procedure of each ratio display setting in FIG.

  The ratio display data acquisition 2 (step S723) in FIG. 36 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The display control unit 115 acquires display data and display determination data corresponding to the ratio display number from the ratio display data table (step S818). The ratio display data table stores ratio display numbers, ratio types, display data, and display determination data in association with each other. Corresponding to the ratio display number “5”, the ratio type “advantageous section ratio (setting 1)”, display data “$ 27B0” (hexadecimal notation) A, B, C, and F are lit, and lit places E, F, and DP are lit in the hundreds place), and display determination data “1” is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number “6”, the type of ratio “continuous character ratio (setting 1)”, display data “$ 7D91” (hexadecimal notation) (01111101 10010001 in binary notation, thousands can be lit The locations A, C, D, E, F, and G are lit, and the illuminated locations A, E, and DP are lit in the hundreds digit), and display determination data “1” is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number “7”, the ratio type “(accessory + AT combination) ratio (setting 1)”, display data “$ 2792” (hexadecimal notation) (in binary notation, “00100111 10010010, thousands” Indicates that the lit locations A, B, C, and F are lit, and the hundreds digit indicates the lit locations B, E, and DP), and the display determination data “1” is stored.

  Corresponding to the ratio display number “8”, the type of ratio “advantageous section ratio (setting 2)”, the display data “$ 27E0” (hexadecimal notation) A, B, C, and F are lit, and lit places F, G, and DP are lit in the hundreds place), and display determination data “1” is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number “9”, the type of ratio “continuous accessory ratio (setting 2)”, display data “$ 7DC1” (hexadecimal notation) (01111101 11000001 in binary notation, thousands can be lit The locations A, C, D, E, F, and G are lit, and the illuminated locations A, G, and DP are lit in the hundreds place), and display determination data “1” is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number “10”, the type of ratio “(accessory + AT combination) ratio (setting 2)”, display data “$ 27C2” (hexadecimal notation) Indicates that the lit locations A, B, C, and F are lit, and the hundreds digit indicates the lit locations B, G, and DP), and the display determination data “1” is stored.

  Corresponding to the ratio display number “11”, the ratio type “advantageous section ratio (setting 3)”, display data “$ 27A4” (hexadecimal notation) A, B, C, and F are lit, and lit places C, F, and DP are lit, and display determination data “1” is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number “12”, the ratio type “continuous accessory ratio (setting 3)”, display data “$ 7D85” (hexadecimal notation) (01111101 10000101 in binary notation, thousands can be lit The locations A, C, D, E, F, and G are lit, and the illuminated locations A, C, and DP are lit in the hundreds digit), and display determination data “1” is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number “13”, the type of ratio “(accessory + AT combination) ratio (setting 3)”, display data “$ 2786” (hexadecimal notation) (in binary notation: 000010111 10000001, thousands place) Indicates that the lit locations A, B, C, and F are lit, and the hundreds digit indicates that the lit locations B, C, and DP are lit), and the display determination data “1” is stored.

  Corresponding to the ratio display number “14”, the type of ratio “advantageous section ratio (setting 4)”, display data “$ 27A8” (hexadecimal notation) A, B, C, and F are lit, and lit places D, F, and DP are lit in the hundreds), and display determination data “1” is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number “15”, the ratio type “continuous accessory ratio (setting 4)”, display data “$ 7D89” (hexadecimal notation) (in binary notation 01111101 10001001, the thousands digit can be turned on) The locations A, C, D, E, F, and G are lit, and the illuminated locations A, D, and DP are lit in the hundreds digit), and display determination data “1” is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number “16”, the ratio type “(accessory + AT combination) ratio (setting 4)”, display data “$ 278A” (hexadecimal notation) (in binary notation, “00100111 10001010, thousands” Indicates that the lit locations A, B, C, and F are lit, and the hundreds digit indicates the lit locations B, D, and DP), and the display determination data “1” is stored.

  Corresponding to the ratio display number “17”, the ratio type “advantageous section ratio (setting 5)”, display data “$ 27B4” (hexadecimal notation) A, B, C, and F are lit, and hundreds places are lit, and lit locations C, E, F, and DP are lit), and display determination data “1” is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number “18”, the type of ratio “continuous character ratio (setting 5)”, display data “$ 7D95” (hexadecimal notation) (01111101 10010101 in binary notation, thousands can be lit Locations A, C, D, E, F, and G are lit, and hundreds of lit locations are lit A, C, E, and DP), and display determination data “1” is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number “19”, the type of ratio “(accessory + AT combination) ratio (setting 5)”, display data “$ 2796” (hexadecimal notation) (in binary notation 00100111 10010110, thousands place) Indicates that the lit locations A, B, C, and F are lit, and the hundreds digit indicates the lit locations B, C, E, and DP), and the display determination data “1” is stored.

  Corresponding to the ratio display number “20”, the type of ratio “advantageous section ratio (setting 6)”, display data “$ 27E8” (hexadecimal notation) A, B, C, and F are lit, and lit places D, F, G, and DP are lit, and display determination data “1” is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number “21”, the ratio type “continuous accessory ratio (setting 6)”, display data “$ 7DC9” (hexadecimal notation) (binary notation 01111101 1100001, thousands can be lit The locations A, C, D, E, F, and G are lit, and the hundreds digit are lit, and the lit locations A, D, G, and DP are lit), and display determination data “1” is stored. Corresponding to the ratio display number “22”, the type of ratio “(accessory + AT combination) ratio (setting 6)”, display data “$ 27CA” (hexadecimal notation) (in binary notation, “00100111 11010010, thousands” Indicates that the lit locations A, B, C, and F are lit, and the hundreds digit indicates the lit locations B, D, G, and DP), and the display determination data “1” is stored.

  The display control unit 115 sets the display data acquired in step S818 to the hundreds and thousands places of the ratio display 69 (step S819). For example, when the ratio display number is 5, $ B0 (hexadecimal notation) is set in the hundreds digit of the ratio indicator 69, and $ 27 (hexadecimal notation) is set in the thousands digit. In step S819, 0 corresponding to turning off is set as the setting value of the thousands of possible lighting points DP (dot portion) of the ratio display 69.

  Then, the display control unit 115 sets $ 4040 (hexadecimal notation) in the display data (step S820). This process is a process for setting the ratio display at the first place and the tens place of the ratio display 69 in the ratio display number for which the display determination data is 0 to “−−” (only the lightable portion G is lit). is there. Then, by performing the processing of step S820 before step S821 described later, the processing of step S820 is also performed in the slot machine in which the display determination data for all the ratio display numbers is 1. Step S820 is executed in this embodiment in which the program for displaying “−−” used in the case of a model having no function relating to the advantageous section has the function relating to the advantageous section. This is a step for avoiding a so-called “unused program” that is not performed.

  Then, the display control unit 115 determines whether or not the display determination data acquired in Step S818 is 0 (Step S821). When it is determined that the display determination data is 0 (YES in step S821), the display control unit 115 sets the display data to the first place and the tens place of the ratio display 69, and here, the ratio display 69 $ 40 (hexadecimal notation) is set for each of the first and tens places (step S828). Then, the processing returns to the processing order of each ratio display setting processing in FIG. In step S828, 0 corresponding to turning off is set as the setting value of the lit place DP (dot portion) at each of the first place and the tens place of the ratio display 69.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the display determination data is not 0 (NO in step S821), the display control unit 115 acquires the value of the ratio RWM address corresponding to the ratio display number (step S822). Here, when the ratio display number is 5, the value of the advantageous section ratio (setting 1) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the advantageous section ratio (setting 1) in FIG. 12) is acquired, and when the ratio display number is 6, , The value of the continuous character ratio (setting 1) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the continuous character ratio (setting 1) in FIG. 12) is obtained, and if the ratio display number is 7, the (character + AT combination) ratio When the value of (setting 1) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the (cassette + AT combination) ratio (setting 1) in FIG. 12) is obtained and the ratio display number is 8, the value of the advantageous section ratio (setting 2) (The value of the storage area corresponding to the advantageous section ratio (setting 2) in FIG. 12) is acquired, and when the ratio display number is 9, the value of the continuous character ratio (setting 2) (the continuous character ratio (setting 2 in FIG. 12) If the value of the storage area corresponding to the setting 2) is acquired and the ratio display number is 10, the (accessory + AT combination) ratio (setting ) (The value of the storage area corresponding to the (character + AT combination) ratio (setting 2) in FIG. 12) and the ratio display number is 11, the value of the advantageous section ratio (setting 3) (FIG. 12) If the ratio display number is 12, the value of the continuous character ratio (setting 3) (the continuous character ratio (setting 3) in FIG. 12) is obtained. When the ratio display number is 13, the value of the (accessory + AT combination) ratio (setting 3) (corresponding to the (accessory + AT combination) ratio (setting 3) in FIG. 12) is obtained. If the ratio display number is 14, the value of the advantageous section ratio (setting 4) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the advantageous section ratio (setting 4) in FIG. 12) is obtained, When the ratio display number is 15, the value of the continuous character ratio (setting 4) (the continuous character ratio (setting 4) in FIG. 12) If the corresponding storage area value is acquired and the ratio display number is 16, the value of the (combination + AT combination) ratio (setting 4) corresponding to the (combination + AT combination) ratio (setting 4) in FIG. If the ratio display number is 17, the value of the advantageous section ratio (setting 5) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the advantageous section ratio (setting 5) in FIG. 12) is obtained, and the ratio When the display number is 18, the value of the continuous character ratio (setting 5) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the continuous character ratio (setting 5) in FIG. 12) is obtained. When the value of the (accessory + AT combination) ratio (setting 5) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the (accessory + AT combination) ratio (setting 5) in FIG. 12) is obtained and the ratio display number is 20, the advantageous section ratio The value of (setting 6) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the advantageous section ratio (setting 6) in FIG. 12) is obtained, and the ratio If the ratio display number is 21, the value of the continuous character ratio (setting 6) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the continuous character ratio (setting 6) in FIG. 12) is acquired. If the ratio display number is 22, The value of (combination + AT combination) ratio (setting 6) (the value of the storage area corresponding to the (combination + AT combination) ratio (setting 6) in FIG. 12) is acquired.

  Subsequent to step S822, the display control unit 115 sets $ 6F6F (hexadecimal notation) to the display data (step S823). In this process, when the value of the ratio RWM is 100, the ratio display at the first place and the tens place of the ratio display 69 is set to “99” (lightable places other than the lightable places E and DP are lit). It is processing for.

  The display control unit 115 determines whether or not the value of the ratio RWM address is 100 (Step S824). If the value of the ratio RWM is determined to be 100 (YES in step S824), the display control means 115 sets the display data to the first place and the tens place of the ratio display 69, and here, the ratio display $ 6F (hexadecimal notation) is set to the first and tens places of 69, respectively (step S828). Then, the processing returns to the processing order of each ratio display setting processing in FIG. In step S828, 0 corresponding to turning off is set as the setting value of the lit place DP (dot portion) at each of the first place and the tens place of the ratio display 69.

  When it is determined that the value of the RWM of the ratio display 69 is not 100 (NO in step S824), the display control unit 115 calculates the quotient and the remainder by dividing the value of the ratio RWM address by 10 (decimal notation). (Step S825). The value of the quotient in decimal notation is the tens value in decimal notation of the value of the ratio RWM address, and the remaining value in decimal notation is one of the values in decimal notation of the value of the ratio RWM address. The value of the place.

  Then, the display control unit 115 performs display data acquisition processing, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 39 for acquiring the tens display data (step S826), and subsequently acquires the ones display data. A display data acquisition process, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 39, is performed (step S827). Then, the display control unit 115 sets the first digit display data acquired in step S827 and the tens digit display data acquired in step S826 to the first digit and tens digit of the ratio display 69 ( Step S828), and returns to the processing order of each ratio display setting processing in FIG. In step S828, 0 corresponding to turning off is set as the setting value of the lit place DP (dot portion) at each of the first place and the tens place of the ratio display 69.

  The display data acquisition process (steps S809, S810, S826, S827) of FIGS. 37 and 38 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The display control unit 115 acquires the bit value of the lower 4 bits of the calculation data in step S808 of FIG. 37 (step S831). Here, in the display data acquisition processing related to the acquisition of the tens place display data, the lower four bits of the quotient value are acquired, and in the display data acquisition processing related to the acquisition of the first place display data, , The bit value of the lower 4 bits of the remainder value is obtained. Since the value of the ratio RWM address is 0 or more and less than 100, the value of the quotient and the value of the remainder are 0 or more and 9 or less in decimal notation, and can be represented by 4 bits in binary notation. For this reason, the lower four bits of the calculation data are obtained.

  Subsequently, the display control unit 115 sets the 8-bit bit value corresponding to the value of the lower 4 bits acquired in step S831 to the display data (step S832), and proceeds to the processing procedure of ratio display data acquisition 1 in FIG. Return.

  In addition, the display control unit 115 acquires the bit value of the lower 4 bits of the calculation data in step S825 in FIG. 38 (step S831). Here, in the display data acquisition processing related to the acquisition of the tens place display data, the lower four bits of the quotient value are acquired, and in the display data acquisition processing related to the acquisition of the first place display data, , The bit value of the lower 4 bits of the remainder value is obtained. Since the value of the ratio RWM address is 0 or more and less than 100, the value of the quotient and the value of the remainder are 0 or more and 9 or less in decimal notation, and can be represented by 4 bits in binary notation. For this reason, the lower four bits of the calculation data are obtained.

  Subsequently, the display control unit 115 sets the 8-bit bit value corresponding to the lower 4 bits acquired in step S831 as the display data (step S832), and the processing procedure of the ratio display data acquisition processing 2 in FIG. Return to

  However, when the lower 4 bits are 0000 (binary notation), the display data includes hexadecimal notation $ 3F (in binary notation, 00111111, lightable locations A, B, C, D, E, and F light). Is set, and if the lower 4 bits are 0001 (binary notation), $ 06 in hexadecimal notation (000001100 in binary notation, lightable locations B and C are lit) is set in the display data, and the lower 4 bits are set. If the bit is 0010 (binary notation), $ 5B in hexadecimal notation (01011011 in binary notation, lit locations A, B, D, E, and G are lit) is set in the display data, and the lower 4 bits are set. If the bit is 0011 (binary notation), the display data is set to $ 4F in hexadecimal notation (01001111 in binary notation, lightable locations A, B, C, D, and G are lit), and the lower four bits are set. Bit Is 0100 (binary notation), $ 66 in hexadecimal notation (01100110 in binary notation, lightable locations B, C, F, and G are lit) is set in the display data, and the lower 4 bits are 0101. In the case of (binary notation), $ 6D in hexadecimal notation (01101101 in binary notation, lightable locations A, C, D, F, and G are lit) is set in the display data, and the lower 4 bits are 0110. In the case of (binary notation), $ 7D in hexadecimal notation (01111101 in binary notation, lightable locations A, C, D, E, F, and G light up) are set in the display data, and the lower 4 bits Is 0111 (binary notation), the display data is set to $ 27 in hexadecimal notation (00100111 in binary notation, the lit locations A, B, C, and F are lit), and the lower 4 bits are 1000 ( In hexadecimal notation), the display data is set to $ 7F in hexadecimal notation (in binary notation, 01111111, lit locations A, B, C, D, E, F, and G are lit), and the lower 4 bits Is 1001 (binary notation), $ 6F in hexadecimal notation (01101111 in binary notation, lightable locations A, B, C, D, F, and G light up) are set in the display data.

According to the above-described embodiment, when the totaling unit 114a determines that the data amount of the totaling result obtained by adding the new totaling amount exceeds the capacity of the storage area of the data set in the RAM 65, the totaling unit 114a adds the new totaling amount. Since the storage contents of the data are not updated based on the totaling result and the previous totaling result is maintained thereafter, various ratios (advantageous section ratios (settings) Value common, set value), accessory ratio (set value common), continuous accessory ratio (set value common, set value specific), (Combination + AT combination) ratio (set value specific) Absent. Therefore, even when the data amount of the data exceeds the storage capacity of the RAM 65, it is possible to detect an irregularity or a failure at an early stage based on the display of the accurate ratio.

  Further, in the ratio display 69, the ratio common to the set values (advantage section ratio, continuous agent ratio, and accessory ratio) and the ratio (advantage section ratio, continuous agent ratio, (actor + AT combination) ratio) for each set value ) Can be displayed, so that a detailed game history can be grasped, and fraud and a malfunction of the gaming machine can be found early. Normally, the ratio display 69 displays a ratio common to set values (advantageous section ratio, continuous agent ratio, accessory ratio), and a ratio for each set value (advantage section ratio, continuous agent ratio). , (Accessory + AT combination) ratio cannot be operated unless the front door 5 is opened, and is not displayed unless the setting change button 50c is operated. Therefore, the ratio display 69 can be seen with the front door 5 opened. Even if there is an opportunity, the general player cannot confirm the ratio (advantage section ratio, the continuous character ratio, the (character + AT combination) ratio) for each set value. If the setting change button 50c is not operated, only the common ratio of the set values (advantageous section ratio, continuous character ratio, character ratio) is displayed, so that the ratio display 69 is displayed with the front door 5 closed. Even if there is a fraudulent act to confirm, it is not possible to confirm the ratio (advantageous section ratio, continuous character ratio, (character + AT combination) ratio) for each set value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the determination of the set value from impairing the fairness of the player.

  Also. Since the game history ((combination + AT combination) ratio) relating to the number of payouts by the AT combination for each set value can be displayed on the ratio display 69, it is possible to easily find fraudulent or malfunction related to the AT combination.

  The common ratio of the set value and the ratio of the continuous character are calculated every 400 games and the display content of the ratio display 69 is updated. Both the ratio and the (combination + AT combination) ratio are calculated for each game and the display content of the ratio display 69 is updated, so that a finer and more accurate ratio display can be performed.

  In addition, among the ratios for each set value, the (government + AT combination) ratio is a small set winning of the bonus game (BB, CB) of the one set value and the AT period with respect to the total payout amount of the one set value. This indicates the total ratio (percentage (%)) of winning combinations of winning combinations (middle bells) in which an advantageous payout of bells can be obtained. By displaying such a ratio, the ratio of the number of paid out medals obtained in an advantageous gaming state to the total number of paid outs can be displayed for each set value, so that fraudulent acts can be found earlier. .

  Also, an advantageous section count flag for counting the number of advantageous section games is provided separately from the advantageous section lamp lighting control data, and the processing of setting the advantageous section counting flag is performed independently of the setting timing of the advantageous section lamp lighting control data. It is possible to set the number of bets for performing the next game after all the rotations of the 13L, 13M, and 13R are stopped, and after all the setting timings of the advantageous section lamp lighting control data in the game have elapsed. This is performed after the game information totalizing process of totalizing various data until the game data becomes available. Thereby, at the time of counting the number of advantageous section games in the game in which the transition from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permitted state is determined, the content of the advantageous section count flag indicates that the game is in the AT permitted state (advantage section). Is not counted as a game in the AT permitted state, and the game in which the transition from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permitted state is determined is not counted as a game in the AT permitted state (advantage section). Can be counted.

  Further, since the processing of setting the advantageous section count flag is performed by setting the advantageous section lamp lighting control data set at the time of processing as the advantageous section count flag, the processing of setting the advantageous section count flag is performed. Can be prevented from increasing in data storage capacity.

  According to this configuration, since the start of the AT allowable transition determination effect and the start of lighting of the advantageous section lamp 47 are performed almost simultaneously, the advantage area lamp 47 is not lit while the AT allowable transition determination effect is performed. This can prevent the player from being distrusted in the AT allowable transition determination effect.

  Further, since the ratio indicator 69 is housed in the sealed board case CS so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace, the five types of game inspection information displayed on the ratio indicator 69 and the ratio display It is possible to prevent the display 69 for the predetermined abnormality notification from being fraudulent. Normally, other lit locations except for some lit locations (in this embodiment, the lit locations DP (dot portion) at the first, tens and thousands places) of the ratio display 69 are shown. The five types of game inspection information (the ratio common to the set values) are sequentially displayed by using the locations, and the display for abnormality notification is performed by using the above-mentioned partially illuminated locations of the ratio display 69. Therefore, the examiner can immediately confirm whether or not the five types of game inspection information include abnormal game inspection information by simply checking the display contents of the ratio display 69. For example, when the abnormality notification is not performed using the above-mentioned part of the lightable portions of the ratio display 69, the inspector determines that all of the five types of game inspection information are displayed on the ratio display 69. Without waiting, it is possible to confirm that none of the five types of game inspection information is in an abnormal state by checking the above-mentioned part of the light-enabled portions of the ratio display 69 immediately after the start of the inspection. In addition, when an abnormality is notified using the above-mentioned part of the light-enabled portions of the ratio display 69, the inspector checks the above-mentioned part of the light-enabled portions of the ratio display 69 immediately after the start of the inspection. By doing so, it can be confirmed that at least one of the five types of game inspection information is in an abnormal state, and then the five types of game inspection information displayed at the other lit locations on the ratio display 69 are displayed. By confirming, it is possible to grasp game inspection information in an abnormal state. In this way, the inspector can perform the inspection accurately and efficiently while preventing fraud.

  In addition, the first dot portion (lightable portion DP) of the ratio display 69 indicates a predetermined abnormality when the game inspection information of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 among the five types of game inspection information is in an abnormal state. The dot portion of the tens digit of the ratio display 69 is used to display the game inspection information of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 and the game inspection information of the ratio display numbers 0 to 2 of the five types of game inspection information. When at least one of them is in an abnormal state, it is used for displaying a predetermined abnormality notification. Thereby, for example, when the game inspection information of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 is higher in importance than the game inspection information of the ratio display numbers 0 and 2, the inspector removes the first-order dot portion of the ratio display 69. By confirming, it is possible to immediately determine whether the game inspection information of the ratio display numbers 3 and 4 having high importance is in an abnormal state.

  When the total number of games is less than 175000, the thousands dot (lightable portion DP) of the ratio display 69 is turned on, so that the examiner can calculate the advantageous section ratio (total: common to the set value). It can be immediately grasped that the total number of games used is less than 175,000. If the total number of games is less than 175000, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative: common to the set value) calculated using at least the total number of games may be in an abnormal state because the total number of parameters is small. The inspector can perform an inspection based on this.

  By setting the ratio blinking timer to a value larger than the value set in the dot blinking timer, the blinking interval of the above-mentioned partially illuminable portions of the ratio indicator 69 is set to The blinking interval is shorter than the blinking intervals of other lightable places except for the part of the lightable places. In other words, the blinking speed of the above-mentioned part of the lightable portions of the ratio display 69 becomes faster than the blinking speed of the other lightable portions of the ratio display 69 excluding the part of the lightable portions. Thereby, the above-mentioned part of the light-enabled portions of the ratio display 69 is conspicuous, so that the inspector can easily confirm the abnormal state at the part of the light-enabled portions. In addition, the blinking of some lightable locations and the blinking of other lightable locations are completely synchronized (both the lightable locations and other lightable locations are turned on and both are turned off). Therefore, it is possible to prevent difficulty in checking the display content of the ratio display 69.

Further, since the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment on the ratio display 69, the inspector can easily determine whether or not fraud has been performed based on the value displayed in the ratio segment. Further, according to this embodiment, the identification segments of the ratio display 69 are determined by the predetermined number of the total number of games (continuous bonus ratio (6000 games: common setting value) and bonus ratio (6000 games: common setting value). ), 6000, advantageous section ratio (total: common to set values), advantageous section ratio for each set value, continuous bonus ratio (total: common to set values), and 175000 for bonus ratio (total: common to set values)
The blinking display is performed until the continuous character ratio for each set value reaches (17500 for the (character + AT combination) ratio for each set value), and after that, the display is lit. Therefore, the examiner can easily recognize whether the display content of the ratio display 69 is before the predetermined number or after the predetermined number is reached. The ratio segments on the ratio display 69 are the advantageous section ratio (cumulative: common to the set value), the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games: common to the set value), the bonus ratio (6000 games: common to the set value), the continuous bonus The calculated values of the ratio (total: common to the set value), the accessory ratio (total: common to the set value), and the ratio by each set value (advantageous section ratio, continuous common agent ratio, (accessory + AT combination) ratio) If the ratio is equal to or greater than a predetermined ratio specified value (a value that is determined to be fraudulent, and if the ratio is equal to or greater than the specified value, it is determined that fraud has been performed), it flashes and is displayed. If it is less than the specified value, it is lit. Therefore, the examiner can easily recognize whether or not the display content of the ratio display 69 is equal to or greater than a predetermined ratio specified value, that is, whether or not fraud has been performed. In addition, the inspector can easily recognize whether the fraud is performed by blinking and lighting the ratio seg without knowing the specified ratio value.

  Further, the counting by the counting means 114a is performed after the determination by the symbol determining means (winning determining means) 109 and before the payout processing by the payout control means 110. Aggregation processing has already been performed even when the power is restored and the power recovery is accompanied by initialization, for example, when the setting is unexpectedly changed during the payout of medals. For this reason, even if a power interruption occurs during the medal payout process, and thereafter, when power is restored, initialization is accompanied, for example, when a setting change occurs unexpectedly during medal payout. Also, the number of medals paid out can be accurately counted.

  Also, the information that is totaled when the predetermined condition is satisfied (every 400 games in the present embodiment) and the information that is totaled even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied (every game in the present embodiment) are separated, so that the totaling is performed. Processing waste can be eliminated. Also, by dividing the calculation items calculated when the predetermined condition is satisfied (every 400 games in the present embodiment) and the calculation items calculated even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied (every game in the present embodiment), In addition, it is possible to eliminate waste of arithmetic processing.

  Further, since the gap Gp is provided between the four 7-segment displays Sd arranged side by side on the one surface 63A side of the main control board 63, one of the main control boards 63 is interposed via the gap Gp between the adjacent 7-segment displays Sd. The side 63A can be seen through, so that the one side 63A of the main control board 63 and the face opposing the one side 63A of the main control board 63 of the 7-segment display Sd having the gap Gp are hidden. Even if an unauthorized component Wc such as an IC is mounted, the unauthorized component Wc can be easily found by visual recognition from the outside.

  Further, by arranging the connection terminals T of each of the seven-segment displays Sd on the side surface on the side of the gap Gp (see FIG. 6), the connection terminals T of the seven-segment display Sd become obstructive, and one surface 63A of the main control board 63. It is no longer possible to mount a fraudulent component Wc such as a fraudulent IC between the ratio indicator 69 including the four 7-segment displays Sd and the surface facing the one surface 63A. It can be prevented reliably.

<Modification 1>
A modification of the ratio indicator 69 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 40, the same reference numerals as those used in FIGS. 1 to 39 related to the above-described embodiment indicate the same or corresponding components. Hereinafter, differences from the above-described embodiment will be described.

  In this example, the four 7-segment displays Sd constituting the ratio display 69 are not arranged side by side as shown in FIG. 6 but are arranged side by side as shown in FIG. This embodiment is different from the above-described embodiment in that four 7-segment displays Sd are alternately shifted in a direction parallel to one surface 63A of the main control board 63 so that the gap Gp is not widened.

  According to this example, an illegal component is placed in a hidden space (one-dot chain line in FIG. 40) P between one surface 63A of the main control board 63 and the surface of each 7-segment display Sd facing the one surface 63A. When the mounting is attempted, the size of the hidden space P is smaller than the vertical or horizontal dimension of the unauthorized component. Therefore, even if the unauthorized component is placed in the hidden space P, a part of the unauthorized component is hidden. In this case, it is more likely that a part of the fraudulent part protrudes from the area immediately below the 7-segment display Sd and becomes easily visible from the outside, so that it is expected that the fraudulent part can be more easily found. When the connection terminal of each of the seven-segment displays Sd is provided on the side surface except the gap Gp side, the size of the hidden space P is smaller than the vertical or horizontal size of the unauthorized component, so that it is physically possible. Unauthorized parts cannot be arranged in the hidden space P.

<Modification 2>
Another modification of the ratio indicator 69 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 41, the same reference numerals as those used in FIGS. 1 to 39 relating to the above-described embodiment denote the same or corresponding components. Hereinafter, differences from the above-described embodiment will be described.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, a transparent cover that covers all the seven-segment displays Sd constituting the ratio indicator 69 is provided as a blocking member that prevents the insertion of foreign matter into the gap Gp between the adjacent seven-segment displays Sd. This is different from the embodiment.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41, when the ratio display 69 is constituted by two two-segment display seven-segment displays Sda, a main body is provided with a gap Gp between the two seven-segment displays Sda. The two 7-segment displays Sda are mounted side by side on one surface 63A of the control board 63, and a transparent cover Cv indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 41 is provided so as to cover all the two 7-segment displays Sda. In addition, T in FIG. 41 is a connection terminal of the 7-segment display Sda.

  Also, a transparent cover Cv covering all of the four 7-segment displays Sd shown in FIG. 6 in the above-described embodiment may be provided, and as shown in FIG. 40, the four 7-segments staggered and arranged side by side. A transparent cover Cv may be provided so as to cover the entire display Sd. Further, it is preferable that a convex lens processing is performed on the upper portion of the gap Gp of the transparent cover Cv or the transparent substrate case CS. In this case, the gap Gp can be enlarged and visually recognized through the convex lens processing portion. Even if a fraudulent component is mounted between the one surface 63A of the control board 63 and the facing surface on the 7-segment display Sd side where the gap Gp is provided, the fraudulent component can be easily found.

  According to this example, even if an attempt is made to insert a foreign matter such as a wire, which is a fraudulent member, from the outside into the gap Gp between the adjacent 7-segment displays Sda for the purpose of performing any fraud, the gap Gp is prevented by the transparent cover Cv which is a blocking member. It is possible to prevent foreign matter from being inserted into the device, and to prevent fraudulent acts.

  The transparent cover Cv as a blocking member does not need to cover the entire peripheral side surface and the entire upper surface of the ratio indicator 69 including the two 7-segment displays Sda, and at least shields the side surface where foreign matter is easily inserted into the gap Gp. If the blocking member shields the side surface, the blocking member does not need to be transparent. In short, the blocking member may have any configuration as long as it can prevent the insertion of foreign matter into the gap Gp.

<Modification 3>
Another modification of the ratio indicator 69 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 42, the same reference numerals as those used in FIGS. 1 to 39 relating to the above-described embodiment indicate the same or corresponding components. Hereinafter, differences from the first embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 42 is a view of the other surface 63B side opposite to the one surface 63A of the main control board 63, and shows a wiring pattern provided on the other surface 63B side of the main control board 63 and a ratio display 69. 42 shows a state in which the connection terminals T of the four 7-segment displays Sd are connected by soldering. In this example, as shown in FIG. 42, the solder connection portion H on the other surface 63B side of the main control board 63 (FIG. The present embodiment is different from the above-described embodiment in that a cover K for covering a plurality of (circle marks) in the drawing is provided.

  According to this example, the wiring pattern on the other surface 63B side of the main control board 63 and the solder connection portion H between the connection terminals T of the four 7-segment displays Sd are externally provided with wire or the like for an unauthorized purpose. Even if an attempt is made to access by an unauthorized member, the solder connection portion H cannot be accessed by the cover K, and an illegal act can be prevented beforehand. Even when the ratio display 69 is configured by two two-segment seven-segment displays as shown in FIG. 41, the solder between the connection terminals of the two seven-segment displays and the wiring pattern is provided. What is necessary is just to provide the cover which covers a connection part.

<Modification 4>
Another modification of the ratio indicator 69 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 43, the same reference numerals as those used in FIGS. 1 to 39 relating to the above-described embodiment denote the same or corresponding components. Hereinafter, differences from the above-described embodiment will be described.

  In this example, the four 7-segment displays Sd constituting the ratio display 69 are not arranged side by side in a line, but are arranged side by side in two rows of two. Is different from the above-described embodiment in that a gap Gp is provided.

  According to this example, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained. Note that, as shown in FIG. 43, the four 7-segment displays Sd are not limited to being arranged in two rows of two, and the seven-segment displays Sd arranged in the vertical direction and / or the horizontal direction may be replaced by the main control board 63. On the other hand, the gap Gp may be shifted in a direction parallel to the surface 63A so as not to widen the gap Gp. Further, in order to prevent foreign matter from being inserted into each gap Gp between the four 7-segment displays Sd arranged as shown in FIG. 43, a blocking member similar to the transparent cover Cv as shown in FIG. 41 is provided. A solder connection between the connection terminals of the four 7-segment displays Sd and the wiring pattern on the other surface 63B side of the main control board 63 may be provided by a cover similar to the cover K as in the fourth embodiment. May be covered.

  In the case where four seven-segment displays Sd are arranged as shown in FIG. 43 and a total of four gaps Gp are provided between the vertically and horizontally adjacent seven-segment displays Sd, a cross shape formed by the four gaps Gp is formed. The connection terminals of the 7-segment display Sd are arranged only on the side of the gap Gp that forms the line, or the connection terminals of the 7-segment display Sd are also arranged on the side of the gap Gp that forms the horizontal line of the cross formed by the four gaps Gp. Then, the connection terminal may be set so as to obstruct an unauthorized component arranged below the 7-segment display Sd, so that the unauthorized component cannot be arranged. Further, the connection terminals of each of the seven-segment displays Sd may be arranged on different sides of the gap Gp. In this case, the connection terminals of any one of the seven-segment displays Sd become obstructive, and Unauthorized parts cannot be placed below.

<Second embodiment>
The second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 47, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

  This embodiment is different from the game information totaling process 1, the game information totaling process 2, the number-of-games updating process, and the total updating process by the totaling unit 114a, and therefore, these processes will be described.

1. Game information totaling process 1
The game information totaling process 1 (step S212 in FIG. 22) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  The tallying unit 114a adds the winning number in the current game to the total payout number in the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. 11, which has been described with reference to FIG. 400 update processing is performed (step S1231). s

  The tallying unit 114a determines whether it is in the first-class accessory (for example, BB) (step S1232). If it is determined that it is not a first-class accessory (NO in step S1232), the flow advances to step S1234. On the other hand, when it is determined that the character is in the first-class accessory (YES in step S1232), the counting unit 114a determines the continuation of the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. The 400 updating process described with reference to FIG. 25, in which the number of winnings in the current game is added to the number of paid-out items, is performed (step S1233). Then, the process proceeds to step S1234.

  In step S1234, the tallying unit 114a determines whether it is in a first-class accessory or a second-class accessory (for example, CB). If it is determined that the character is in the first-class accessory or the second-class accessory (YES in step S1234), the process advances to step S1236. On the other hand, when it is determined that the character is neither a first-class character nor a second-class character (NO in step S1234), the counting unit 114a determines whether the character is a normal character (eg, SB) (step S1234). Step S1235). If it is determined that the character is in the normal accessory (YES in step S1235), the process proceeds to step S1236. If it is determined that the character is not in the normal accessory (NO in step S1235), the process proceeds to step S1237.

  In step S1236, the tallying unit 114a adds the number of winnings in the current game to the number of bonuses paid out in the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. The 400 updating process described above is performed (step S1236), and the process proceeds to step S1237.

In step S1237, the tallying unit 114a determines whether or not the total game number upper limit flag is 0 (that is, the total game number of FIG. 11 is updated at the next update timing by the game number update process described later with reference to FIG. 46). It is determined whether or not it is determined that the total data may possibly exceed the storage capacity (4 bytes). When it is determined that the total game number upper limit flag is not 0 (NO in step S1237), the process proceeds to step S1241. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total game number upper limit flag is 0 (YES in step S1237), the tallying unit 114a adds 1 to the total game total number in FIG. 11, which will be described with reference to FIG. The game number updating process is performed (step S1238), and the process proceeds to step S1239.

  In step S1239, the counting unit 114a determines whether or not the advantageous section count flag is ON (“1”) (whether or not the advantageous section count flag indicates that the current game is counted as the number of advantageous section games). ) Is determined. If it is determined that the advantageous section count flag is not on (contents indicating that counting is not performed) (NO in step S1239), the process advances to step S1241. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section count flag is ON (contents indicating counting) (YES in step S1239), the counting unit 114a adds 1 to the number of advantageous section games in FIG. A game number update process described below is performed (step S1240), and the process proceeds to step S1241.

  In step S1241, the tallying unit 114a sets 19 to the number of ratio calculations.

  Subsequently, the tallying unit 114a performs an update process of adding 1 to the 400 counter (game number counter 652) (step S1242). Then, the tallying unit 114a determines whether the 400 counter is 400 (step S1243). Then, when it is determined that the 400 counter is not 400 (NO in step S1243), the process returns to the main processing procedure of FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 400 counter is 400 (YES in step S1243), the counting unit 114a resets the 400 counter to 0, and sets 23 to the number of ratio calculations (step S1244). That is, 23 is set as the number of ratio calculations for every 400 games, and the advantageous section ratio (total: common to the set value), the continuous bonus ratio (6000 games: common to the set value), the accessory ratio (6000 games: common to the set value) , Continuous bonus ratio (total: common to set value), bonus ratio (total: common to set value), ratio by set value (advantageous section ratio of setting 1 to setting 6, continuous bonus ratio of setting 1 to 6, setting) In other games, the ratio calculation frequency is set to 19, and the advantageous section ratio (total: common to the set value) and the ratio by set value (for the other game) are calculated. Only the advantageous section ratios of the settings 1 to 6, the continuous character ratios of the settings 1 to 6, and the (character + AT combination) ratios of the settings 1 to 6 are calculated. Note that the ratio calculation count is decremented by one in the timer interrupt processing of FIG. 29 (for details, see step S675 of FIG. 33), and at the end of the next game in which the ratio calculation count is newly set. By this time, sufficient time has elapsed for all calculations to be completed.

  Subsequent to step S1244, the tallying unit 114a accumulates the total payout number from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. 11 and stores the accumulation result in the cumulative PS as the total payout number for the latest 6000 games. The 6000 update process described with reference to FIG. 27 is performed for every 400 games (step S1245). Subsequently, the tallying unit 114a accumulates the number of consecutive payouts from the first term P1 to the fifteenth term P15 in FIG. 11, and stores the accumulation result in the cumulative PS as the consecutive payout number of the last 6,000 games. The 6000 update process described with reference to FIG. 27 is performed for every 400 games (step S1246). Subsequently, the tallying unit 114a accumulates the number of payables from the first term P1 to the fifteenth term P15 in FIG. 11 and stores the accumulation result in the cumulative PS as the number of payables for the latest 6000 games. The 6000 update process described with reference to FIG. 27 is performed for every 400 games (step S1247).

  Subsequent to step S1247, the tallying unit 114a determines whether or not the total payout upper limit flag is 0 (that is, the total payout number in FIG. It is determined whether or not the accumulated data has a possibility of exceeding the storage capacity (4 bytes) (step S1248). When it is determined that the total payout upper limit flag is not 0 (NO in step S1248), the process proceeds to step S1252.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the total payout upper limit flag is 0 (YES in step S1248), the tallying unit 114a sets the total cumulative number of payouts in FIG. 11 from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15. The total payout number of the total total is updated by adding the total payout number of the period corresponding to the ring pointer (the total payout number of the latest 400 games). The cumulative update processing described in detail later with reference to FIG. , Every 400 games (step S1249). Subsequently, the totaling means 114a adds the consecutive number of consecutive bonuses to be paid in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 (for the last 400 games). (The number of consecutive bonuses to be paid out) is added to the total number of consecutive bonuses to be paid out, and a cumulative update process described later in detail with reference to FIG. 47 is performed for every 400 games (step S1250). Subsequently, the tallying unit 114a adds the number of bonuses to be paid in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 (for the last 400 games) A total update processing of updating the total cumulative number of paid-out articles by adding the number of paid-out figures is performed for every 400 games (step S1251), which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 47 (step S1251). move on.

  In step S1252, the counting unit 114a updates the ring pointer. The ring pointer indicates the first period P1, the second period P2, the third period P3,..., The fourteenth period P14, the fifteenth period P15, the first period P1, the second period P2,. In other words, it is updated every 400 games so as to indicate the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 while repeating the sequence.

  The counting means 114a determines whether or not the ring pointer update result is 0, that is, whether or not the ring pointer has returned to the initial position (step S1253). If it is determined that the ring pointer update result is not 0 (NO in step S1253), the process advances to step S1255. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ring pointer update result is 0 (YES in step S1253), the counting unit 114a determines that the number of games since installation or after RWM clear has reached 6000 games, and thus the 6000 reaching flag is set to $ FF. (Hexadecimal notation) is set (step S1254), and the process proceeds to step S1255. The 6000 arrival flag is set to $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) at the time of installation or RWM clear.

  The counting means 114a clears the total payout number (the oldest payout number for the 400 games) of the period corresponding to the updated ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. Is set to 0 (step S1255). Subsequently, the tallying unit 114a calculates the number of consecutive payouts (the oldest number of consecutive payouts for 400 games) for the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. The value is cleared to 0 (step S1256). Subsequently, the tallying unit 114a clears the number of bonuses to be paid in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. The value is set to 0 (step S1257). Then, the process returns to the procedure of the main process in FIG.

2. Game information totaling process 2
The game information totaling process 2 (step S213 in FIG. 22) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  The counting means 114a determines whether or not the total payout upper limit flag corresponding to the set value set by the setting control means 101 is 0 (that is, at the next update timing by the cumulative update processing described later with reference to FIG. 47). It is determined whether or not it is determined that the total data of the total number of payouts (for each set value) in FIG. 12 may exceed the storage capacity (4 bytes) (step S1281). If it is determined that the total payout upper limit flag is not 0 (NO in step S1281), the flow proceeds to step S1289.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the total payout upper limit flag corresponding to the set value set by the setting control unit 101 is 0 (YES in step S1281), the totaling unit 114a performs the total payout of the set value in FIG. The total payout number of the set value is updated by adding the number of medals paid out by winning the small combination to the number of payouts (step S1282). This update is performed every game.

  Next, the tallying unit 114a determines whether or not it is in a first-class accessory (for example, BB) (step S1283). If it is determined that the character is not in the first-class accessory (NO in step S1283), the process advances to step S1285. On the other hand, if it is determined that the player is in the first-class role (YES in step S1283), the counting unit 114a adds the number of medals paid out by winning to the number of continuous role payouts of the set value in FIG. Is added to update the number of consecutive bonus payouts of the set value (step S1284). This update is performed every game.

  In step S1285, the tallying unit 114a determines whether it is in a first-class accessory or a second-class accessory (for example, CB). If it is determined that the character is in the first-class accessory or the second-class accessory (YES in step S1285), the process advances to step S1288. On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the first-class accessory nor the second-class accessory (NO in step S1285), the counting unit 114a determines whether or not the AT period is in progress (step S1286). In this determination, the counting means 114a determines the ON / OFF state of the flag during the AT period, and if the flag is set to ON, determines that it is during the AT period.

  If it is determined in step S1286 that the AT period is in progress (YES in step S1286), the tallying unit 114a selects the winning combination group “left bell”, “middle bell”, “right bell” (presses) in the role lottery. (Step S1287), and it is determined whether or not an advantageous pressing order has been notified based on the AT period (step S1287). If it is determined that the winning has been performed (YES in step S1287), the tallying unit 114a adds the number of medals paid out by winning to the bonus + AT payout number of the set value in FIG. Is updated (step S1288). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1286 that the AT period is not during the AT period (NO in step S1286), and in step S1287, the push order bell has not been won or the push order bell has been won, but it is advantageous. If it is determined that the pressing order is not notified (NO in step S1287), the process advances to step S1289.

  In step S1289, the tallying unit 114a determines whether or not the total game number upper limit flag of the set value set by the setting control unit 101 is 0 (that is, the next game number updating process described later with reference to FIG. It is determined whether or not it is determined that there is a possibility that the total data of the total number of games (for each set value) in FIG. When it is determined that the total game number upper limit flag is not 0 (NO in step S1289), the game information totaling process 2 ends, and the process proceeds to step S214 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total game number upper limit flag is 0 (YES in step S1289), the tallying unit 114a adds 1 to the total game number of the set value in FIG. 12, using FIG. A game number update process, which will be described in detail later, is performed (step S1290), and the flow advances to step S1291.

  In step S1291, the counting unit 114a determines whether or not the advantageous section count flag is ON (“1”) (whether or not the advantageous section count flag indicates that the current game is counted as the number of advantageous section games). ) Is determined. When it is determined that the advantageous section count flag is not on (contents indicating that counting is not performed) (NO in step S1291), the game information totaling process 2 ends, and the process proceeds to step S214 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section count flag is on (contents indicating counting) (YES in step S1291), the counting unit 114a adds 1 to the number of advantageous section games of the set value in FIG. A game number updating process, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 46, is performed (step S1292), and the process proceeds to step S214 in FIG. It should be noted that the timer interrupt prohibition process may be performed immediately before the game information totalization process 1 is started, and the timer interrupt permission process may be performed after the game information totalization process 2 ends. In this case, a timer interrupt occurs during the tallying, so that one of the game information tallying processing for the common set value and for each set value is updated based on the result of the game, It is possible to prevent a situation in which the other side has not been updated based on the result of the game, and the update including the result of the game can be reliably performed in both the tallying processes.

3. Game Number Update Processing The game number update processing (steps S1238 and S1240 of FIG. 44 and steps S1290 and S1292 of FIG. 45) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  Here, in the game number updating process related to the total number of games in step S1238, 4 bytes of the total cumulative number of games in FIG. 11 are to be updated, and in the game number updating process related to the advantageous section game number in step S1240, FIG. 4 bytes of the total cumulative number of advantageous section games are to be updated, and in the game number update process relating to the total number of games in step S290, the total number of games of the set value set by the setting control means 101 in FIG. The byte is an update mode, and in the game number update processing related to the number of advantageous section games in step S1292, 4 bytes of the number of advantageous section games of the set value set by the setting control unit in FIG. 12 are to be updated.

First, the counting means 114a performs an update process of adding 1 to the value of the lower 2 bytes of the 4 bytes of the RWM 65 address to be updated (step S1331), and then updates the lower 2 bytes (that is, the update). It is determined whether or not the value of the subsequent lower 2 bytes) is 0 (step S1332). Here, when it is determined that the update result is not 0 (NO in step S1332), the process proceeds to step S1334. On the other hand, when it is determined that the update result of the lower 2 bytes is 0 (YES in step S1332), since the carry has occurred, the counting unit 114a determines the upper 2 bytes of the 4 bytes of the RWM 65 to be updated. An update process of adding 1 to the byte value is performed (step S1333), and the process proceeds to step S334.

  In step S1334, the tallying unit 114a stores, in a predetermined storage area (the temporary calculation RWM address: 2 bytes) set in the RWM 65, the lower 2 bits of the address of the RWM 65 to be updated after the processing in steps S1331 to S1333. Set the byte value. Note that the provisional calculation RWM address is provided to determine in advance whether or not the capacity of the storage area of the data to be updated exceeds the capacity when the next update is assumed.

  Subsequently, the counting unit 114a performs an update process of adding 1 to the value of the RWM address for provisional calculation (lower 2 bytes of the RWM 65 address to be updated) (step S1335), and updates the lower 2 bytes (that is, the lower 2 bytes). It is determined whether or not the value of the updated lower 2 bytes is 0 (step S1336).

  If it is determined in step S1336 that the update result is not 0 (NO in step S1336), the process returns to the game information tallying process 1 of FIG. 44 or the game information tallying process 2 of FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the update result of the lower 2 bytes is 0 (YES in step S1336), since the carry has occurred, the counting unit 114a sets the temporary calculation RWM address in the steps S1331 to S1333. The value of the upper 2 bytes of the address of the RWM 65 to be updated after the processing is set (step S1337).

  Subsequently, the counting means 114a performs an update process of adding 1 to the value of the RWM address for provisional calculation (upper 2 bytes of the RWM65 address in the update mode) (step S1338), and updates the status 2 bytes (ie, , The value of the upper 2 bytes after the update) is 0 (step S1339).

If the update result is determined not 0 (NO in step S1339), even if the next update is performed in RWM65 address to be updated it does not exceed the maximum value ² 32 -1 representable 4 bytes (storage capacity) 44 is determined by the calculation on the temporary calculation RWM address, and the process returns to the game information totaling process 1 of FIG. 44 or the game information totalizing process 2 of FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the update result of the upper 2 bytes is 0 (YES in step S1339), when the next update is performed at the address of the RWM 65 to be updated, the maximum that can be represented by 4 bytes (storage capacity) It is found by calculation on the RWM address for provisional calculation that the value exceeds the value 2 ³² -1. In this case, the tallying unit 114a sets $ FF (hexadecimal notation) in the total game number upper limit flag (step S1340), and returns to the game information tallying process 1 of FIG. 44 or the game information tallying process 2 of FIG. That is, the total game number upper limit flag is set to ON in the immediately preceding game exceeding the storage capacity of the RWM 65 to be updated (step S1340). The accumulated data of the number of games (common to the setting value, by setting) and the cumulative data of the number of advantageous section games (common to the setting value, by setting) are not updated. That is, the data of the RWM 65 to be updated stored in the immediately preceding game that exceeds the storage capacity of the RWM 65 to be updated is maintained. The total game number upper limit flag is set to $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) at the time of installation or RWM clear.

  In this embodiment, the game number update process related to the total game number and the game number update process related to the advantageous section game number are performed in the same subroutine. Therefore, this subroutine has functions related to the advantageous section. It is designed to be executed even for models that do not. On the other hand, if the game number update process related to the total game number and the game number update process related to the advantageous section game number are performed in separate subroutines, if the model does not have the function related to the advantageous section, The subroutine for the number-of-games update process relating to the number of advantageous section games is not executed, resulting in a so-called “unused program”. However, in the present embodiment, the game number update process related to the total game number and the game number update process related to the advantageous section game number are performed in the same subroutine. Therefore, this subroutine has a function related to the advantageous section. Even if the model is not used, it does not become an “unused program”, and even if the model has a different performance, the program can be diverted and the burden on development can be reduced.

  Also, in the number-of-games updating process relating to the advantageous section number of games, a processing step of setting the total number-of-games upper limit flag is included. $ FF (hexadecimal notation) is set, and $ FF (hexadecimal notation) is not set to the total game number upper limit flag in the game number update process related to the number of advantageous section games.

  In this embodiment, in step S1331 and step S1333, the address of the RWM 65 to be updated is directly rewritten. May be performed, and the value of the RWM 65 to be updated may be updated based on the tally result.

4. Cumulative Update Processing The cumulative update processing (steps S1249, S1250, S1251 in FIG. 44) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  The counting unit 114a acquires an RWM address (addition RWM address) corresponding to the ring pointer (step S1370). However, as the RWM address corresponding to the ring pointer, in the cumulative update process related to the total payout number in step S1249, the total payout number in the period corresponding to the ring pointer from the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. Of the storage area (2 bytes) is obtained, and in the cumulative update process related to the number of consecutive bonus articles to be paid in step S1250, the ring pointer in the first period P1 to the fifteenth period P15 in FIG. Is obtained, the address of the storage area (2 bytes) of the number of consecutive bonuses to be paid in the period corresponding to the period is acquired. The address of the storage area (2 bytes) of the number of payouts in the period corresponding to the ring pointer in the fifteenth period P15 is obtained.

  Subsequent to step S1370, the counting means 114a updates the value of the lower two bytes of the added RWM address by adding the value of the added RWM address to the value of the lower two bytes of the added RWM address (step S1371). However, in the cumulative update process related to the total payout number in step S1249, the lower 2 bytes of the total payout number in the total cumulative number in FIG. 11 are the lower 2 bytes of the added RWM address, and In the cumulative update process, the lower two bytes of the total number of consecutive bonuses of the total bonus in FIG. 11 are the lower two bytes of the RWM address to be added. The lower two bytes of the total cumulative number of payouts are the lower two bytes of the added RWM address.

  Then, the counting means 114a determines whether or not the calculation result in step S1371 is a carry, that is, whether or not a carry has occurred (step S1372). If it is determined that the calculation result is not a carry (NO in step S1372), the flow advances to step S1375. On the other hand, when the calculation result is determined to be a carry-on (YES in step S1372), the counting means 114a updates the added RWM address (step S1373). However, the updated RWM address to be added is the address of the upper 2 bytes of the total payout number in FIG. 11 in the cumulative update processing related to the total payout number in step S1249, and the continuous payout number in step S1250. 11 is the address of the upper two bytes of the total number of consecutive bonuses in the total cumulative number in FIG. 11, and in the cumulative update processing related to the number of bonuses in the total number in FIG. This is the address of the upper 2 bytes of the payout number.

  Then, the counting means 114a updates the value of the upper two bytes of the added RWM address by adding 1 to the value of the upper two bytes of the added RWM address (step S1374), and proceeds to step S1375.

  In step S1375, the counting means 114a stores, in a predetermined storage area (the temporary calculation RWM address: 2 bytes) set in the RWM 65, the lower 2 bytes of the augmented RWM address after the processing in steps S1370 to S1374. Set the value. Note that the provisional calculation RWM address is provided to determine in advance whether the capacity of the storage area (added RWM address) of the data to be updated exceeds the capacity when the next update is assumed.

  Subsequently, the counting means 114a adds the maximum value of the data amount expected at the time of the next update to the value of the temporary calculation RWM address (lower 2 bytes of the added RWM address) (step S1376). Proceed to S1377. Here, the maximum value of the data amount assumed at the time of the next update is, for example, 400 games × 9 = 3600 in the case of the total payout number (common to the set value) in this embodiment. That is, in this embodiment, since the update processing of the total payout number (cumulative) is performed every 400 games, the data amount when it is assumed that the maximum payout number (9 pieces) is obtained in every 400 games Is the maximum value.

  Then, the counting means 114a determines whether or not the calculation result in step S1376 is a carry, that is, whether or not a carry has occurred (step S1377). When it is determined that the calculation result is not a carry-on (NO in step S1377), the process returns to the game information totaling process 1 in FIG. On the other hand, if the operation result is determined to be a carry-on (YES in step S1377), the counting means 114a sets the upper 2 bytes of the augmented RWM address as the temporary calculation RWM address (step S1378), and The value of the RWM address for provisional calculation (corresponding to the upper two bytes of the RWM address to be added) is updated by adding 1 to the value of (1) (step S1379), and the flow advances to step S1380. However, the augmented RWM address at this time is the address of the upper two bytes of the total cumulative total number of payouts in FIG. 11 after passing through steps S1370 to S1374 in the cumulative update processing relating to the total number of payouts in step S1249. In the cumulative update process related to the number of consecutive bonuses to be paid in step S1250, the upper two bytes of the total number of consecutive bonuses to be paid out in FIG. 11 after steps S1370 to S1374 are used. In the cumulative update process related to the number of sheets, this is the address of the upper 2 bytes of the total cumulative number of payables in FIG. 11 after steps S1370 to S1374.

Subsequently, the counting means 114a determines whether or not the update result in step S1379 is 0 (whether or not the value of the upper 2 bytes is 0) (step S1380). If it is determined that the update result is not 0 (NO in step S1380), the process returns to the game information totaling process 1 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the update result is 0 (YES in step S1380), the maximum value of the data amount assumed at the time of the next update is added to the 4-byte value of the added RWM address updated in the game. Since the result of the addition exceeds the 4-byte maximum value 2 ³² -1, the counting means 114a sets $ FF (hexadecimal notation) in the total payout upper limit flag (step S1381), and counts up the game information in FIG. It returns to the processing procedure of processing 1. Here, the total payout upper limit flag is set to $ 00 (hexadecimal notation) at the time of installation or RWM clear.

  Since the total payout upper limit flag is set to ON in the game (the update timing) (step S1381), except for the case where the RWM is cleared, the total payout number (after the update timing next to the update timing) is set. The data of the total sum of the common payouts (common to the set values), the total sum of the number of consecutive payouts (common to the set values), and the total of the total number of payables (common to the set values) are not updated. That is, in the update timing, when there is a possibility that the capacity of the addend RWM address exceeds the 4-byte capacity at the next update timing, the addend updated at the update timing is updated except when the RWM is cleared. The data of the RWM address continues to be maintained.

  In addition, the cumulative update process related to the number of consecutive bonuses and the cumulative update process related to the number of bonuses also include a process step of setting a total payout upper limit flag. First, $ FF (hexadecimal notation) is set in the total payout upper limit flag, and the total game number upper limit flag is set in the cumulative update process related to the continuous number of bonuses and the cumulative update process related to the number of bonuses to be paid. FF (hexadecimal notation) is not set.

  In this embodiment, in step S1371 and step S1374, the augmented RWM address to be updated is directly rewritten. However, for example, a totaling address is separately set in the RWM 65, and in this address, steps S1370 to S1380 are executed. Processing may be performed, and the value of the RWM 65 to be updated may be updated based on the result of the aggregation.

  The cumulative update process (steps S1282, S1284, and S1288) in FIG. 45 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the process of updating the data for each setting (total of the total number of payouts, total of the number of consecutive bonuses, and total of the number of bonuses + AT number of bonuses), first, instead of step S1370 in FIG. The RWM address of each item (total payout number, continuous payout number, and bonus + AT payout number) is acquired. However, in the cumulative update process related to the total payout number (total: by setting value) in step S1282 as the RWM address of each item, the total payout number set in a place different from the address of the total total by setting in FIG. An RWM address of (for each setting, the game: 2 bytes) is obtained, and in the cumulative update process related to the number of consecutive bonuses to be paid out (total: for each setting value) in step S1284, the total number of settings for each setting in FIG. The RWM address of the consecutive number of bonuses to be paid (for each setting, the game) set at a location different from the cumulative address is obtained, and the bonus + AT number of cards to be paid out at step S1288 (total: by setting value). In the cumulative update process according to the above, the RWM address of the bonus item + AT combination payout number (for each setting, the game) set at a different place from the address of the total cumulative for each setting in FIG. It will be but is acquired. This RWM address becomes the added RWM address in step S372.

  Subsequently, in step S1371, the counting means 114a updates the value of the lower 2 bytes of the added RWM address by adding the value of the added RWM address to the value of the lower 2 bytes of the added RWM address. However, in the cumulative update process related to the total payout number (total: by setting value) in step S1282 in FIG. 45, 4 bytes of the total total of the total payout number corresponding to the set value set by the setting control unit 101 (see FIG. 45). 12) is the 4 bytes of the RWM address to be added, and in the cumulative update process relating to the number of consecutive bonuses to be paid out in step S1284 in FIG. 45, the consecutive bonuses payout corresponding to the set value set by the setting control means 101 The total 4 bytes of the total number of sheets (see FIG. 12) are the 4 bytes of the RWM address to be added, and are set by the setting control means 101 in the cumulative update processing relating to the number of bonuses + AT payouts in step S1288 in FIG. A total of 4 bytes (see FIG. 12) of the sum of the bonus and the number of AT payouts corresponding to the set value that is present is 4 bytes of the RWM address to be added.

  Thereafter, the same processing as in steps S1372 to S1381 in FIG. 47 is performed.

  In addition, the processing step of setting the total payout upper limit flag is also performed in the cumulative update processing related to the number of consecutive bonus articles paid out (total: by setting value) and in the cumulative updating processing related to bonus goods + AT payout number of sheets (total: by setting value). Although it is included, $ FF (hexadecimal notation) is set to the total payout upper limit flag first in the cumulative update processing related to the total payout number (cumulative: according to the set value), and the continuous payout number is $ FF (hexadecimal notation) is not set in the total game number upper limit flag in the cumulative update process related to (total: by set value) and the cumulative update process related to the number of paid-out articles (cumulative: by set value). .

  In this embodiment, in the steps S1371 and S1374 of the update process of the total update processing of the data for each setting (total total of the total number of payouts, total of the total number of consecutive bonus payouts, total of the number of bonuses + AT number of payouts). Although the augmented RWM address to be updated is directly rewritten, for example, an address for aggregation is separately set in the RWM 65, and the processing of steps S1370 to S1380 is performed on the address, and the augmented RWM address is calculated based on the aggregation result. The value of the RWM address may be updated.

Further, in this embodiment, if the sum of the data amount at the update timing of the total total of each item and the maximum value of the data increase amount expected at the next update timing exceeds the storage capacity, the next and subsequent times Was not updated, but, for example, the data amount obtained by subtracting the data amount of the maximum value from the storage capacity of the address set to store the total data of each item is stored in advance as a threshold value. If it is determined that the data amount at a certain update timing has exceeded the threshold value, the next and subsequent updates may not be performed. For example, since a value that can be stored in 4 bytes is up to 2 ³² −1, a value obtained by subtracting the maximum value of the data amount to be increased at the next update timing of 9 × 400 = 3600 from this value is stored as a threshold value. At the update timing, the determination is made by comparing with the total data amount at that time. Further, it is not always necessary to set the threshold value to a value obtained by subtracting the maximum value. For example, the threshold value may be a value obtained by further reducing the margin value, such as changing the value to be reduced from 3600 to 6000. In this way, it is possible to cope with another model or increase the number of 400 games in the update cycle without changing the software.

  According to this embodiment, in addition to the effects achieved in the first embodiment, it is necessary to set a save RWM address for the game number update process shown in FIG. 26 and a save RWM address for the cumulative update process shown in FIG. Therefore, the capacity of the RWM 65 can be reduced.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modified examples, and various changes other than those described above can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention.

  For example, exceeding the capacity of the storage area of the RWM 65 for storing the data of the total cumulative number of payouts (common to the set value), the total of each data (the total number of payables (common to the set value), the continuous number of payables ( In the state where the update of the (total total) of the setting values) is no longer performed, a specific lighting location of the ratio display 69 is lit or blinked, such as blinking the hundreds of lit locations DP of the ratio display 69. Thus, it may be notified that the update has not been performed. In addition, a dedicated lighting place for notifying that may be provided on the ratio display 69, and further, a separate display may be provided for notifying that. Also, for the data for each set value, the ratio display 69 may notify that the data has not been updated.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the process of updating the total sum of the total number of payouts (common to the set value) (step S250), the process of updating the total total of the number of consecutive payouts of common (common to the set value) (step S252), The update processing (step S253) of the total sum of the number of articles paid out (common to the set value) is performed for each 400 games, but may be updated for each game.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the (combination + AT combination) ratio for each set value is set to an advantageous combination (middle row) because the number of payouts by the combination and the navigation at the time of winning the push order bell during the AT period. The ratio (percentage (%)) of the sum of the number of payouts at the time of winning the prize to the total number of payouts is displayed. Thus, these may be displayed separately.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ratio (the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio, the (character + AT combination) ratio) for each set value is calculated for each game, but is calculated for each predetermined number of games (for example, (Every 400 games).

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the storage capacity of the total cumulative data exceeds or is likely to exceed, the ratio display is performed while maintaining the data up to that time without updating. With such a configuration, the ratio display may be performed even for the total cumulative data exceeding the storage capacity. In this case, a storage area for storing the ratio at the time of reaching the upper limit and for storing the number of times at which the upper limit is reached is provided so that these can be specified. After that, the storage area of the total data is cleared and the data is stored again. For example, the ratio of the calculation result at the time of the first upper limit (the ratio when the upper limit is reached) is stored as 60%, and the current total cumulative data amount after clearing is 1/10 of the storage area. Assuming that the ratio of the calculation result at this time is 10%, the ratio from the installation of the gaming machine is 60% × (10 / (10 + 1)) + 10% × (1 / (10 + 1)) = 55% ( (The first decimal place is rounded off.) Further, if the value is 50% when the second upper limit is reached, the data stored as the ratio when the upper limit is reached is 60% × (1 / (1 + 1)) + 50% × (1 / ( 1 + 1)) = 55%. When the upper limit reaching number is 2 and 55% is stored as a ratio when the upper limit is reached at that time, the data amount of the current total accumulated data that has been further cleared is 1/10 of the storage area, Assuming that the ratio of the calculation result at this time is 10%, the ratio from the installation of the gaming machine in this case is 55% × (20 / (20 + 1)) + 10% × (1 / (20 + 1)) = 53. % (Rounded to the first decimal place). In this way, the number of times the upper limit has been reached and the average ratio at the time of reaching the upper limit are stored, and further ratio calculation is performed using the ratio calculated based on the current total total that has not reached the upper limit after clearing. Thus, an accurate ratio can be calculated even for the total cumulative data exceeding the storage capacity.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, the winning probability of the hand that shifts from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permitted state (winning role group “middle cherry”, “common bell 1”) depends on the set value. However, the same is applied, but the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning.

  In the above-described embodiment, the blinking interval of the first place, the tens place, and the thousands place of the lightable portions DP used for the display for notification of the predetermined abnormal state is the display of the game inspection information. Is shorter than the blinking intervals of the other lit places except for the lit places DP of the first place, tens place and thousands place used in the ratio display 69, but is not limited to this. For example, the following may be used. The light-enabled portion DP corresponding to the content of the abnormal state among the light-enabled portions DP of the first digit, the tens digit, and the thousands digit of the ratio indicator 69 may be always turned on. In this case, for example, steps S53 and S56 in FIG. 20 may be deleted, steps S657 to S659 in FIG. 32 may be deleted, and steps S715 and S716 in FIG. 34 may be deleted.

  The game inspection information described in the above-described embodiment is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. The content of the abnormal state is also an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the blinking control for the game inspection information, the thousandth possible lighting position DP of the thousandth and hundredth lighting possible positions of the ratio display 69 until the number of games reaches a predetermined value. The lightable locations except for the (dot portion) are blinked, and when the ratio of the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) or the like is equal to or more than the specified ratio value, ten of the tens place and the ones place of the ones place on the ratio display 69 are displayed. The lightable portions except for the lightable portions DP (dot portions) at the first place and the first place are made to blink, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if there is any abnormality in the game inspection information, the game inspection information is displayed on the ratio display 69 at the illuminable locations except for the illuminated locations DP (dot portion) at each of the thousands, tens and tens places. May be blinked and displayed. In this case as well, similarly to the above-described embodiment, the blinking interval of each of the thousands of places, the tens place, and the ones place of the lightable portion DP (dot portion) of the ratio display 69 is the same as that of the ratio display 69. The blinking intervals of the other lit locations except for the lit locations DP of the tens, tens and tens places may be shorter.

  In the above-described embodiment, the illuminable portions A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and DP of the ratio display 69 may be constituted by full-color LEDs. An abnormality notification may be performed. For example, a display color for abnormality notification is determined in advance corresponding to each ratio display number, and a display for abnormality notification is performed using a color corresponding to the ratio display number having an abnormal ratio.

  In the above-described embodiment, only one threshold value of the ratio used for abnormality notification is provided for each ratio display number. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of threshold values may be provided. Good. In this case, it is preferable that the abnormality notification be displayed in a different display mode for each stage.For example, the display mode may be changed by changing the blinking speed, or the display mode may be changed between blinking and lighting. And so on.

  In the above-described embodiment, in a plurality of illuminable locations for reporting an abnormal state, the illuminated locations are notified of the abnormal state in the same display mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the type of inspection data in an abnormal state may be notified by making the display mode different at one lightable location. For example, in the first place where light can be turned on (dot portion), the continuous character ratio corresponding to the ratio display number 3 (cumulative: common to set value) is abnormal at 0.1 second intervals, and 0.5 second intervals When the blinking indicates that the ratio of the accessory corresponding to the ratio display number 4 (total: common to the set value) is abnormal, and when lit, both the continuous agent ratio (total: common to the set value) and the accessory ratio (total: common to the set value) It is abnormal.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display items (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), (1), (2) are displayed. ), The display control is performed so that the display is switched in a certain display period in the order of, but is not limited to this. For example, a display item in an abnormal state is detected when the power is turned on or when the door is opened. The display control may be performed so that the display is preferentially performed based on the display item, and the display period of the display item in the abnormal state is set to be longer than the display period of the display item in the abnormal state. The switching timing may be controlled.

  Further, in each of the embodiments described above, a plurality of tally items and a plurality of calculation items have been described. However, a modification may be made such that some of the plurality of tally items and a plurality of calculation items described in the embodiment are used. The modification may be made such that another total item or a multiple operation item is added to all or a part of the plural total items or the plural operation items described in the embodiment. Further, specific numerical values such as the predetermined tallying criterion and the setting tallying criterion described in the embodiment are merely examples, and are not limited thereto, and can be appropriately changed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game determined to shift from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissible state is not counted as a game in the AT permissible state, that is, a game in an advantageous section. In the processing 1, the game information totalizing processing 2 in FIGS. 24 and 45, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section count flag is on, and when it is on, the processing of adding 1 to the number of advantageous section games is performed. . However, the game determined to shift from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permissive state is not counted as a game in the AT permissible state because the operation from the operation of the start switch 19 until the lottery process is performed, or Among the setting timings of the advantageous section lighting control data of the advantageous section lamp 47 in which a plurality of timings exist, the earliest timing (timing before S207 in FIG. 22) (hereinafter, referred to as “first setting timing”). ), When the advantageous section lamp lighting control data is ON (content indicating that the advantageous section lamp 47 is lit), one is added to the number of advantageous section games, and OFF (content indicating that the advantageous section lamp 47 is turned off). In this case, it can also be realized by not adding 1 to the number of advantageous section games (not updating the number of advantageous section games). A technique referred to as "another method 1".).

  In another method 1, if the total payout number is calculated from the operation of the start switch 19 until the lottery process is performed until the total payout number of medals other than the number of advantageous section games is counted, or until the first set timing, Is calculated from the operation of the start switch 19 of the next game to the time when the lottery process is performed or the period up to the first set timing. At the end of the game, the total payout calculated with the actual total number of payouts and the like is calculated. The consistency with the number of sheets and the like cannot be obtained. In another method 1, the number of advantageous section games is counted from the operation of the start switch 19 until the lottery process is performed or during the period up to the first set timing, and the total payout number excluding the number of advantageous section games is calculated. If the counting is performed after the symbol determination processing, the counting processing is performed at a plurality of timings, so that the number of statements related to the counting processing increases, and the program capacity increases. Further, in another method 1, if the total of the number of advantageous section games and the total number of games are counted from the operation of the start switch 19 until the lottery process is performed, or during the period up to the first set timing, the number of games during the game is changed. Even games that did not end normally due to interruption or the like are counted as the number of advantageous section games or the total number of games.

  Such a problem of the alternative method 1 does not occur in the method described in the above-described embodiment, and therefore, it can be said that the method of the above-described embodiment is superior to the alternative method 1. However, even in the first alternative method, it is possible to achieve the purpose of not counting a game determined to shift from the AT non-permissible state to the AT permitted state as a game in the AT permitted state, that is, a game in an advantageous section.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the slot machine 1 and the pachinko gaming machine have been described as examples of the gaming machine of the present invention. However, the present invention is applied to a gaming machine called a parrot combining a slot machine and a pachinko machine. When the present invention is applied to such a gaming machine, a pachinko ball may be adopted as a gaming value. Further, the gaming machine of the present invention may be applied to a video game in which a computer program is executed. In this case, a physical medium such as a medal or a pachinko ball or electronic data is used as a gaming value. It is good to manage outgoing balls.

  In addition, instead of the left, middle, and right reels 13L, 13M, and 13R in the above-described embodiment, an image display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT is used, and a plurality of symbols are sequentially displayed on the image display device. You may. Also, the number of rotating reels may be two or more, and may be set to an optimal number as appropriate according to the game mode.

  Further, the data stored in the game information storage means 653 in FIG. 7 can be read out from the main control board 63 to the outside by performing a specific process. The game information stored in the game information storage means 653 in FIG. 7 can be externally confirmed on a display device such as the credit display 45 or the liquid crystal display 27. The RWM 65 shown in FIGS. 3 and 7 has a structure in which data is retained without being erased even when the power of the housing 3 is turned off. Further, the data stored in the game information storage means 653 in FIG. 7 has a structure in which the data is not erased by an external operation. Further, if it is determined based on the data stored in the game information storage means 653 of FIG. 7 that there is a high possibility that an illegal act has been performed, the game may be stopped or the number of balls may be restricted. Is also possible.

  The display of the game history information described above may be applied to a pachinko machine. In this case, for example, the ratio (percentage (%)) of the number of prize balls at the time of the big hit to the total number of prize balls may be calculated in a predetermined cycle.

  Note that the above contents may be appropriately combined.

  A display unit having a plurality of variable display columns for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols; a start operation unit for performing an operation for causing a player to start variable display of all of the variable display columns; Stop operation means for performing an operation for stopping the variable display of each column, and a notification lamp for notifying that a special game is permitted in a special game state in which a special game for notifying an advantageous operation mode of the stop operation means can be specified. The present invention can be widely applied to a gaming machine which includes a control means for controlling the progress of a game and which can set a bet amount and play a game.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Slot machine 3 ... Housing 5 ... Front door 13L, 13M, 13R ... Reel 19 ... Start switch 21L, 21M, 21R ... Stop switch 61 ... Main CPU
69 ... ratio display 103 ... role lottery means 106 ... reel rotation control means 109 ... symbol determination means 114a ... totaling means 114b ... calculation means 115 ... display control means 118 ... payout display control means

Claims (3)

A symbol display unit having a plurality of variable display columns for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, a start switch for starting the variable display of the symbol display unit, and stopping the variable display corresponding to each of the plurality of variable display columns A gaming machine having a stop switch
The main control unit is provided for controlling on the progress of a game, a main control board that is accommodated in the board case,
The main control means includes:
A role lottery means for performing a role lottery to determine whether or not a plurality of types of roles are won;
Stop control means for performing stop control for stopping each variable display of the plurality of variable display columns based on an operation on each of the stop switches,
Based on the symbol combination of the plurality of variable display rows stopped by the stop control by the stop control means, a prize determining means for determining whether or not a winning is achieved;
Payout control means for performing a game value payout process based on the determination result by the winning determination means,
Tallying means for tallying data relating to specific information among the information relating to the game in each first tally period, and tallying in each second tally period consisting of the first tally periods for which tally is completed ,
A counting result storage unit configured to be able to store a first counting result in the first counting period and a second counting result in the second counting period by the counting unit;
Calculating means for performing a predetermined calculation using the second aggregation result ;
With
The first tally result is stored in a first storage area of N (N is an integer of 1 or more) bytes in the tally result storage means, and the second tally result is stored in the tally result storage unit. (N × 2) bytes in the second storage area in the means,
The tallying unit adds, for each game in the first tallying period, the value of the data based on the determination result by the winning determination unit to the storage value of the first storage area in each game in the first tallying period. And by updating the result, the first counting result in the first counting period is stored in the first storage area,
The tallying unit is configured to perform the first storage at a predetermined tallying timing after storing the first tallying result in the first tally period in the first storage area in each of the first tallying periods. By adding the first tally result stored in the area in the first tally period to the storage value of the second storage area before being updated at the tally timing, the new tally result is updated. It is possible to store the second counting result in the second counting period in the second storage area,
The counting means,
In a certain first aggregation period, the first aggregation result in the certain first aggregation period is stored in the first storage area at a certain aggregation timing after the first aggregation result is stored in the first storage area. The total value of the first aggregation result in the certain first aggregation period and the storage value of the second storage area before being updated at the certain aggregation timing can be stored in the second storage area. A determination process is performed to determine whether the value exceeds the maximum value. If the value is not exceeded, the storage value of the second storage area is updated at the certain aggregation timing. no line Ukoto updated stored value of the second storage area in each aggregate timing of a summary timing or later,
In the determination process, the first counting result of N bytes in the certain first counting period stored in the first storage area and the second counting result before being updated at the certain counting timing are used. The lower total value obtained by summing the value of the lower N bytes of the storage value of (N × 2) bytes in the storage area exceeds the maximum value that can be stored in the lower N bytes, and is updated at the certain aggregation timing. When the value of the upper N bytes of the (N × 2) bytes stored value of the previous second storage area satisfies both that the maximum value that can be stored in the upper N bytes, the total value A gaming machine characterized by determining that the value exceeds a maximum value storable in a second storage area . A symbol display unit having a plurality of variable display columns for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, a start switch for starting the variable display of the symbol display unit, and stopping the variable display corresponding to each of the plurality of variable display columns A gaming machine having a stop switch
The main control unit is provided for controlling on the progress of a game, a main control board that is accommodated in the board case,
The main control means includes:
A role lottery means for performing a role lottery to determine whether or not a plurality of types of roles are won;
Stop control means for performing stop control for stopping each variable display of the plurality of variable display columns based on an operation on each of the stop switches,
Based on the symbol combination of the plurality of variable display rows stopped by the stop control by the stop control means, a prize determining means for determining whether or not a winning is achieved;
Payout control means for performing a game value payout process based on the determination result by the winning determination means,
Tallying means for tallying data pertaining to specific information among information related to the game at a prescribed counting timing based on the determination result by the winning determination means,
Counting result storage means for storing the counting result by the counting means,
Calculating means for performing a predetermined calculation by using the aggregation result ;
With
The counting means,
At the first aggregation timing, the aggregation result is stored in the aggregation result storage means, and at the second and subsequent aggregation timings, the minutes from the previous aggregation timing to the aggregation timing are aggregated. It is possible to update the storage content of the tally result storage means as a new tally result by adding the sum of the previous tally result stored in the tally result storage means and
To the data amount of a new tally result obtained by summing the tally amount at a certain tally timing and the previous tally result, the data amount of the tally amount assumed when the minutes from the certain tally timing to the next tally timing is added up If it is determined that the data amount obtained by adding the maximum value exceeds the storage capacity of the tallying result storage unit, the tallying result storage unit is updated based on the new tallying result, and then the next tallying is performed. By not updating the storage contents of the tally result storage means for the subsequent tally amount including the tally amount at the timing, the new tally result stored in the tally result storage means is maintained at the certain tally time. A gaming machine characterized by continuing. A symbol display unit having a plurality of variable display columns for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, a start switch for starting the variable display of the symbol display unit, and stopping the variable display corresponding to each of the plurality of variable display columns A gaming machine having a stop switch
Main control means for controlling the progress of the game is provided, comprising a main control board housed in a board case,
The main control means includes:
A role lottery means for performing a role lottery to determine whether or not a plurality of types of roles are won;
Stop control means for performing stop control for stopping each variable display of the plurality of variable display columns based on an operation on each of the stop switches,
Based on the symbol combination of the plurality of variable display rows stopped by the stop control by the stop control means, a prize determining means for determining whether or not a winning is achieved;
Payout control means for performing a game value payout process based on the determination result by the winning determination means,
Counting means for counting the first data relating to the first specific information and the second data relating to the second specific information among the information relating to the game;
The first totaling result of the first data and the second totaling result of the second data by the totaling means can be stored in a first storage area and a second storage area. Counting result storage means,
Calculating means for performing a predetermined calculation using the first counting result and the second counting result;
With
Before the second aggregation result exceeds the maximum value that can be stored in the capacity of the second storage area, the first aggregation result can be stored in the capacity of the first storage area. It exceeds the maximum value,
The tallying means includes, for each first tallying period, a value of the first data based on a determination result by the winning determination means in each game in the first tallying period and each game in the first tallying period Totaling the values of the second data based on the determination result by the winning determination means in
The tallying unit is configured to perform the tallying at a specified tallying timing after the tallying of the first data and the tallying of the second data in the first tallying period in each of the first tallying periods. The totalization result of the first data in the first totalization period, which was lastly totaled, is added to the storage value of the first storage area before being updated at the totalization timing, and is updated. Thereby, it is possible to store the first tally result in the new second tally period in the first storage area, and to collect the first tally result last collected before the tally timing. By adding the count result of the second data in the count period to the storage value of the second storage area before being updated at the count timing and updating the result, the count value in the new second count period is updated. The second counting result is written in the second It is possible to store in the area,
The totaling result of the first data in the first totaling period, which was lastly totaled before the totaling timing at the totaling timing, and the storage of the first storage area before being updated at the totaling timing If the sum of the values exceeds the maximum value that can be stored in the first storage area, the value is changed from a first value indicating the maximum value or less to a second value indicating exceeding the maximum value. Flag is provided,
The tallying means, at a certain tallying timing,
It is determined whether the flag has reached the second value before the certain aggregation timing,
If it is determined that the flag has reached the second value before the certain aggregation timing, the storage values of the first storage area and the second storage area are not updated,
If it is determined that the flag has not reached the second value before the certain counting timing, the first value in the first counting period last counted before the certain counting timing is reached. It is determined whether the total value of the total result of the data and the storage value of the first storage area before being updated at the certain total timing exceeds the maximum value that can be stored in the first storage area. If it is determined that the value will be exceeded, the flag is changed from the first value to the second value, and the storage value of the first storage area is not updated. When it is determined that the storage value of the first storage area is to be updated,
It is determined whether or not the flag after the determination / update processing has reached the second value. If the flag has not reached the second value, the storage value of the second storage area is updated, When the value is the second value, the storage value of the second storage area is not updated.
Yu Technical machine characterized a call.

Images